Low voltage air circuit-breakers SACE Emax
Low voltage air circuit-breakers SACE Emax
Low voltage air circuit-breakers SACE Emax
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
Technical catalogue<br />
604019/011 en<br />
March '99<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.<br />
<strong>Low</strong> <strong>voltage</strong> <strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
690 V • 800-6300 A • 40-150 kA (380/415 V)
GENERAL INDEX<br />
Introduction<br />
Technology and innovation<br />
for advanced plant<br />
engineering requirements 2<br />
More efficient, safer<br />
installations 4<br />
“Intelligent design” 6<br />
Design tools 8<br />
Compact switchboards 9<br />
Optimal warehouse<br />
management 10<br />
A design dedicated<br />
to Quality and respect<br />
for the environment 12<br />
Standards, approvals,<br />
certifications and<br />
company Quality System 14<br />
Main characteristics<br />
Electrical specifications 18<br />
Construction<br />
characteristics 20<br />
Identification of <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
26<br />
Versions and<br />
connections 27<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112<br />
microprocessor-based<br />
overcurrent releases 28<br />
Derived versions 32<br />
Special versions 35<br />
Accessories 36<br />
Installation in<br />
switchboards<br />
Installation in<br />
switchboards 38<br />
Change in the rated<br />
uninterrupted current<br />
in relation to<br />
temperature 42<br />
Derating in altitude 48<br />
Current-limiting and<br />
specific let-through<br />
energy curves for <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
E2L - E3L 49<br />
Overcurrent<br />
releases and<br />
relative accessories<br />
Overcurrent protection<br />
with <strong>SACE</strong> PR111<br />
microprocessor-based<br />
releases 52<br />
Trip curves of <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
with <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR111 releases 56<br />
Overcurrent protection<br />
with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
microprocessor-based<br />
release 58<br />
Trip curves of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
with <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112 releases 62<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K<br />
signalling unit 67<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T<br />
configuration test unit 68<br />
Accessories<br />
Circuit-breaker and<br />
fixed part accessories 70<br />
Spare parts and<br />
retrofitting 84<br />
Applications of the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Primary and secondary<br />
distribution 86<br />
Selectivity tables 90<br />
Earth fault protection 91<br />
Switching and protection<br />
of transformers 96<br />
Protection of lines 97<br />
Switching and protection<br />
of generators 98<br />
Switching and protection<br />
of asynchronous<br />
motors 100<br />
Switching and protection<br />
of capacitors 102<br />
Overall dimensions<br />
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<br />
104<br />
breaker 108<br />
Mechanical interlock<br />
Circuit-breaker<br />
113<br />
accessories 114<br />
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong><br />
diagrams<br />
Operating state shown 118<br />
Circuit diagram<br />
symbols 119<br />
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong><br />
diagrams 120<br />
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1<br />
Circuit-breaker 128<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
Circuit-breaker 131<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
Circuit-breaker 136<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4<br />
Circuit-breaker 144<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6<br />
Circuit-breaker 145<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector 150<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector 152<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector 155<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector 158<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector 160<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> CS<br />
Isolating truck 162<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> MTP<br />
Earthing switch 163<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> MT<br />
Earthing truck 164<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> PF<br />
Fixed parts 165<br />
Circuit-breaker and<br />
fixed part accessories 167<br />
Microprocessor-based<br />
releases and current<br />
transformer 172<br />
Conversion kit for<br />
fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
or fixed parts 173
Introduction<br />
Characteristics<br />
Installation in switchboards<br />
Releases<br />
Accessories<br />
Applications of the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Overall dimensions<br />
Circuit diagrams<br />
Ordering codes
Technology and innovation<br />
for advanced plant engineering requirements<br />
The constant increase in the technological and functional complexity<br />
of electrical installations makes it essential for every<br />
component - particularly those such as protection <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
s which are crucial to safety - to offer the highest levels<br />
of continuity of service and reliability combined with minimal<br />
maintenance requirements.<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. has designed the new generation of <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
low <strong>voltage</strong> <strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in line with these advanced<br />
plant engineering requirements, and featuring high resistance<br />
to mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses.<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> represent the logical functional<br />
complement to <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax S moulded case <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
and have, like them, been designed for integration and perfect<br />
co-ordination with the different lines of ABB low <strong>voltage</strong> products.<br />
2<br />
The new series<br />
has been designed<br />
in accordance with<br />
the most modern<br />
ergonomical criteria,<br />
and the evidence<br />
for this can be seen in the<br />
prize awarded to the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> at the<br />
Hanover Forum Design.<br />
The design and manufacture of the new <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> follow<br />
advanced ergonimical criteria, in line with the solutions<br />
adopted for selection and use of <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax S switchgear -<br />
entirely to the benefit of all catagories of customers and users.<br />
Two aspects received particular attention during design: the<br />
modular versatility and physical dimensions of the different<br />
sizes, reduced from the six of the <strong>SACE</strong> Megamax series to<br />
four.<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are available in five different models:<br />
E1, E2, E3, E4 and E6, each of which benefits from the interchangeability<br />
of the various different versions of moving parts<br />
(with different breaking and rated current capacities) for the<br />
same fixed part. The rated uninterrupted currents range from<br />
800 to 6300 A.<br />
The breaking capacities, which have been improved in relation<br />
to the previous series, range from 40 kA to 150 kA (380/<br />
415 V a.c.).
The principal benefits of the<br />
new <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
are as follows:<br />
• Smaller overall dimensions<br />
• Dimensions (height and<br />
depth) the same across the<br />
entire series<br />
• Common accessories for<br />
the entire range<br />
• The same service releases<br />
for a.c./d.c. applications<br />
• Shared components - e.g.<br />
the opening and closing<br />
releases are the same<br />
• Easy assembly of the current<br />
transformers (CT)<br />
• Accessories fitted without<br />
need for cabling, reducing<br />
stock levels and optimising<br />
“logistical” costs<br />
• Distances from exposed<br />
conductive parts to be respected<br />
zero for withdrawable<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
• Simplified construction of<br />
electrical switchboards.<br />
Briefly, high safety, quality,<br />
and rational design characteristics<br />
combined with compact<br />
dimensions are the results<br />
of the totally innovative<br />
design criteria which lie behind<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0398 <strong>Emax</strong>0399<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0403<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0397<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0346<br />
3
<strong>Emax</strong>0396<br />
More efficient, safer installations<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> not only ensure the high level of<br />
reliability needed to achieve the necessary service continuity,<br />
but also offer a high level of safety for everyone operating on<br />
the installation, both during functional customisation and<br />
during inspection and maintenance.<br />
The risk of carrying out incorrect and dangerous sequences<br />
of operations is impeded by the presence of suitable locks.<br />
Each sequence is only enabled if all the conditions which ensure<br />
it can be carried out safely and correctly have been respected.<br />
In any case, the state of the switchgear is automatically taken<br />
to the highest safety level for the operator performing the<br />
operation.<br />
Accessories are installed from the front of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
without cabling and the accessories section is separate from<br />
the power <strong>circuit</strong>.<br />
4<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0393 <strong>Emax</strong>0395<br />
Going into greater detail, the main solutions adopted to protect<br />
operators in the various different operating conditions are<br />
as follows:<br />
• Double insulation, to ensure total segregation of the seatings<br />
for accessories from the power <strong>circuit</strong>.<br />
• Key locks or padlock devices, to control enabling of opening<br />
and closing operations and/or racking in and out<br />
• Racking out with the door closed, to enable the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
to be racked out and into its fixed part with the switchboard<br />
door closed.<br />
• Anti-insertion locks, to prevent mobile parts being inserted<br />
in fixed parts with different rated currents or when the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
is closed.
<strong>Emax</strong>0400 <strong>Emax</strong>0408<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
offer outstanding reliability in<br />
terms of both mechanical<br />
and electrical life, and in the<br />
field of low <strong>voltage</strong> apparatus<br />
up to 6300A, represent<br />
the maximum in terms of performance,<br />
whilst with regard<br />
to their structural characteristics,<br />
their indices allow a<br />
high level of sturdiness to be<br />
achieved.<br />
5
Electrical installation designers choosing the new <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> can offer a vast range of solutions that enable<br />
them to satisfy the specific demands of every user without<br />
obliging them to adapt their needs to the switchgear available.<br />
When looking through the detailed <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> catalogue of<br />
the complete and highly specialised range, the versatility and<br />
possibility of optimal sizing become immediately apparent.<br />
The rated current and breaking capacity levels have been<br />
studied to ensure optimal sizing in all plant configurations. In<br />
addition to this, the designer and end user benefit from a further<br />
important performance feature: the possibility of integrating<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in intelligent control and supervision<br />
systems.<br />
The need to optimise the management of electrical installations<br />
is increasingly being recognised today, particularly where<br />
power consumption, control, monitoring, diagnostics and, consequently,<br />
maintenance operations are concerned.<br />
Benefiting from the know-how acquired with its other series of<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. has specially designed and<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0336 “Intelligent design”<br />
6<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0401<br />
manufactured a family of microprocessor-based releases,<br />
called <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112, that are able to provide a<br />
wide range of important dedicated functions for <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release, in particular, features a 16 bit microprocessor<br />
and 12 bit analogue to digital converter, making its<br />
performance even more accurate.
offer load control, self-test and information transmission capabilities<br />
in addition to the traditional protection functions, enabling<br />
them to be interfaced with centralised control and supervision<br />
systems. ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. offers all the components<br />
needed to build systems that are tailored to each installation,<br />
from field units to front ends (with standard communication<br />
protocols), from actuators to control systems.<br />
As a result, the work of specifiers and designers is considerably<br />
simplified when it comes to choosing the technical characteristics<br />
and performance required.<br />
All this is thanks to the fact that the selection criteria are common<br />
to several families of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> and use intuitive<br />
and easy-to-read codes and symbols.<br />
The new <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> build on the successful experience<br />
acquired with the <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax S family, continuing a tradition<br />
of switchgear designed and manufactured paying particular<br />
attention to use and user interface-related aspects, with obvious<br />
advantages in terms of ergonomics, clarity and speed of<br />
identification.<br />
Level 1<br />
MV SWITCHBOARD<br />
Level 2<br />
Level 3<br />
Optic fibre<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0368<br />
SD-P2 SD-P2 SD-P2<br />
PR512<br />
Copper cable<br />
PR112<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0473 The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> fitted with microprocessor-based releases<br />
PR211<br />
Personal Computer<br />
for supervision and control<br />
electro-optical converters 4 max<br />
LV SWITCHBOARD<br />
Range of <strong>Emax</strong>, Megamax,<br />
Isomax S and LV <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
not provided with<br />
microprocessor units<br />
PR1<br />
PR211<br />
SD-D1 / SD-D2<br />
7
<strong>Emax</strong>0483 Design tools<br />
Three highly useful work tools are available<br />
for designing and sizing electrical<br />
installations (DOC software, slide rule kit,<br />
guide to L.V. installations) which facilitate<br />
calculations, ensure the installation conforms<br />
to the relevant standards and decrease<br />
the risks of errors. They include<br />
information on different low <strong>voltage</strong> products<br />
such as: <strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>,<br />
moulded case <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, modular<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, contactors, thermal relays,<br />
fuse switch-disconnectors.<br />
The two main software products developed<br />
by ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V., called D.O.C.<br />
and C.A.T.s, have been put together on a<br />
single CD-Rom.<br />
D.O.C. (Design Optimization & Computation)<br />
is an optimized sizing system for<br />
low <strong>voltage</strong> industrial installations and is<br />
able to recommend the best design selections<br />
for cables, busbars and protection<br />
devices. It allows the design engineer<br />
to develop clear and complete design<br />
documentation rapidly in compliance with<br />
the most recent standards.<br />
The C.A.T.s (Computer Aided Technical<br />
selection) is both an electronic catalogue<br />
and a technical instrument for helping to<br />
select and add accessories to each single<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker. By means of guided<br />
paths, the most suitable apparatus for the<br />
requirements of individual installations can<br />
be selected, configured and ordered. Detailed<br />
documentation is also available, containing<br />
the instruction, maintenance and<br />
installation manual and the technical construction<br />
drawings for each product.<br />
There are some utility programs which<br />
8<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0410<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0409<br />
also allow generation of orthogonal views,<br />
configured in Autocad format, as well as<br />
drawing of the trip curves of the various<br />
releases.<br />
Four different coloured slide rules form<br />
the ABB kit, enabling rapid electrical installation<br />
sizing calculations. They can be<br />
used to calculate:<br />
• The sizing of cables and calculation of<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> currents (yellow slide rule)<br />
• Verification of cable protection against<br />
direct contact and short-<strong>circuit</strong>s (orange<br />
slide rule)<br />
• Selective and back-up co-ordination<br />
(green slide rule)<br />
• The sizing of motor lines and transformer<br />
outgoing feeders (blue slide rule).<br />
The calculation methods and data on the<br />
slide rules have been obtained from the<br />
CEI, IEC and NFC Standards in force and<br />
from plant engineering practice.<br />
The guide to low <strong>voltage</strong> installations<br />
is a summary of the legal and technical<br />
regulations based on current standards<br />
regarding the design, sizing and installation<br />
of electrical systems. The guide<br />
considers the user installation starting<br />
from the power supply (MV/LV substation)<br />
in category 1 systems.
The need to build increasingly compact<br />
switchboards to satisfy the architectural<br />
and technical requirements of modern<br />
buildings while simultaneously rationalising<br />
the related construction process is fully<br />
met by the new <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
which have a constant depth and height<br />
from 800 through to 6300 A.<br />
The new ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. “<strong>air</strong>” <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
makes it possible to standardise<br />
the support structures for the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>,<br />
considerably facilitating construction<br />
of the switchboards themselves.<br />
The reduced width of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
offers the benefit of more rational use of<br />
the space available and makes it possible<br />
to build compact switchboards both in the<br />
case of standard 400 mm (up to 2000 A)<br />
and standard 1000 mm columns.<br />
Moreover, the fact that a wide range of terminals<br />
is available for the entire series<br />
makes it possible to build switchboards<br />
mounted against walls or switchboards<br />
which can be accessed from behind with<br />
rear connections.<br />
W Fixed Withdrawable<br />
3/4 POLI 3/4 POLI<br />
E1 - E2 296 / 386 324 / 414<br />
E3 404 / 530 432 / 558<br />
E4 566 / 656 594 / 684<br />
E6 782 / 908 810 / 936<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0421 Compact switchboards<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0345<br />
Fixed<br />
418 mm<br />
Withdrawable<br />
461 mm<br />
W<br />
Fixed 302 mm<br />
Withdrawable 396.5 mm<br />
9
Optimal warehouse management<br />
A single range of accessories serves the<br />
entire <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
This standardisation enables optimal<br />
warehouse management while simultaneously<br />
ensuring every solution possible<br />
can be customised. Electrical distributors<br />
and every customer who has to manage<br />
maintenance and spare parts for large<br />
installations consequently benefits from<br />
simpler warehouse management.<br />
The ease with which accessories are installed<br />
makes modular fitting operations<br />
fast and safe, allowing even the end customer<br />
to carry out the customising required<br />
in each different phase of the life<br />
of an installation.<br />
The designer’s job is made much easier<br />
since the switchgear can be chosen well<br />
in advance, preventing any overlapping<br />
with the phase for finalising the construction<br />
details.<br />
The current transformers for the different<br />
rated currents of the releases are very<br />
simple to change, meaning the end customer<br />
can also carry out this operation.<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 microprocessor-based<br />
releases are, likewise, easy<br />
to change and are also interchangeable.<br />
Moreover, conversion kits are available<br />
for the different terminal solutions and versions<br />
of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, allowing a<br />
very high level of warehouse rationalisation.<br />
The fixed parts for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
are common to each model, irrespective<br />
of the rated current and breaking<br />
capacity.<br />
10<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0343<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0479
<strong>Emax</strong>0402<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0404<br />
A design dedicated to Quality<br />
and respect for the environment<br />
The new <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> have been developed<br />
in an environment where quality<br />
research has always been an overriding<br />
commitment. A commitment that<br />
involves every company function at ABB<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> L.V. and has made it possible to<br />
12<br />
obtain prestigious international marks of<br />
recognition.<br />
The Company Quality System has been<br />
certified by RINA (Registro Italiano<br />
Navale - Italian Naval Register), one of<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0347<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0361<br />
the most prestigious international certification<br />
bodies, and conforms to the ISO<br />
9001 Standard, while the ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.<br />
test laboratory has been accredited by<br />
SINAL.<br />
Commitment to care for the environment<br />
is another priority at ABB, confirmed by<br />
the fact that the Frosinone factory’s environmental<br />
management system has<br />
been certified by RINA.<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V., the first industrial company<br />
in the electro-mechanical sector in<br />
Italy to obtain this, thanks to an ecologycentred<br />
revision of its manufacturing<br />
process, has been able to reduce its raw<br />
material consumption and machining<br />
scrap by 20%.
<strong>Emax</strong>0394<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0348<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.’s commitment to protecting<br />
the environment can also be seen in<br />
the product Life Cycle Assessments<br />
(LCA) carried out in its Research Centre.<br />
The materials, processes and packaging<br />
used are chosen with a view to optimising<br />
the real environmental impact of<br />
each product, including its energy efficiency<br />
and recyclability.<br />
13
and company Quality System<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0344 Standards, approvals, certifications<br />
The certification of conformity with the above-mentioned product<br />
Standards is carried out following European Standard EN 45011<br />
by the Italian certification body ACAE (Associazione per la<br />
Certificazione delle Apparecchiature Elettriche - Association<br />
for the Certification of Electric Appliances), recognised by the<br />
European body LOVAG (<strong>Low</strong> Voltage Agreement Group).<br />
The ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. Quality System conforms to the International<br />
Standard ISO 9001 (quality assurance model for design,<br />
development, manufacture, installation and service) and the<br />
equivalent European Standard EN ISO 9001 and Italian Standard<br />
UNI EN ISO 9001.<br />
The third party certifying body is RINA-QUACER.<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> gained its first certification, valid for three years, in<br />
1990 and has now received certification for the third time.<br />
14<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0360<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
and their accessories conform<br />
to the International<br />
Standards IEC 947, EN<br />
60947 (harmonised in the 17<br />
CENELEC countries), CEI EN<br />
60947 and IEC 1000, and<br />
conform to the relevant CE<br />
directives:<br />
– “<strong>Low</strong> Voltage Directives”<br />
(LVD) No. 73/23 EEC<br />
– “Electromagnetic compatibility<br />
Directive” (EMC) No.<br />
89/336 EEC.<br />
The apparatus complies with<br />
the specifications of the regulations<br />
for on-board installations<br />
and is approved by the<br />
following Naval Registers:<br />
– RINA (Italian Naval Register)<br />
– Det Norske Veritas<br />
– Bureau Veritas<br />
– Germanischer Lloyd<br />
– Loyd’s Register of Shipping<br />
– Polskj Reiestr Statkow
<strong>Emax</strong>0362<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0363<br />
ISO 9001<br />
15
INDEX<br />
Main characteristics<br />
Electrical specifications 18<br />
Construction characteristics 20<br />
Identification of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> 26<br />
Versions and connections 27<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 microprocessor-based<br />
overcurrent releases 28<br />
Derived versions 32<br />
Special versions 35<br />
Accessories 36<br />
17
Electrical specifications<br />
Specifications common to the entire range<br />
Voltages<br />
Rated service <strong>voltage</strong> Ue 690 ~ / 250 – [V]<br />
Rated insulation <strong>voltage</strong> Ui 1000 [V]<br />
Rated impulse withstand <strong>voltage</strong> Uimp 12 [kV]<br />
Service temperature -5 … +70 [°C]<br />
Storage temperature -40 … +70 [°C]<br />
Frequency f 50-60 [Hz]<br />
Number of poles 3-4<br />
Versions Fixed - Withdrawable<br />
Circuit-breaker model<br />
18<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0264<br />
E1 E2<br />
Performance level B B N L<br />
Currents<br />
Rated uninterrupted current Iu Iu<br />
[A] 800 1600 1250 1250<br />
(at 40 °C) [A] 1250 2000 1600 1600<br />
[A] 2000<br />
[A]<br />
[A]<br />
Capacity of neutral pole on four-pole <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> [%Iu] 100 100 100 100<br />
Rated ultimate short-<strong>circuit</strong> Icu 220/230/380/400/415 V~ [kA] 40 40 65 130<br />
breaking capacity<br />
440 V ~ [kA] 40 40 65 110<br />
500/660/690 V ~ [kA] 36 40 55 85<br />
250 V — [kA] 36 40 55 –<br />
Rated service short-<strong>circuit</strong> Ics 220/230/380/400/415 V~ [kA] 40 40 65 130<br />
breaking capacity 440 V ~ [kA] 40 40 65 110<br />
500/660/690 V ~ [kA] 36 40 55 65<br />
250 V — [kA] 36 40 55 –<br />
Rated short-time (1s) Icw (1 s) [kA] 36 40 55 10<br />
withstand current Icw (3 s) [kA] – 40 40 –<br />
Rated short-<strong>circuit</strong> making Icm 220/230/380/400/415 V~ [kA] 84 84 143 286<br />
capacity (peak value) 440 V ~ [kA] 84 84 143 242<br />
500/660/690 V ~ [kA] 75,6 84 121 187<br />
Utilisation category (in accordance with CEI EN 60947-2) B B B A<br />
Isolation behaviour (in accordance with CEI EN 60947-2)<br />
Overcurrent protection<br />
• • • •<br />
Microprocessor-based releases for a.c. applications<br />
Operating times<br />
• • • •<br />
Closing time (max) [ms] 80 80 80 80<br />
Break time for IIcw (max)<br />
Overall dimensions<br />
[ms] 30 30 30 12<br />
Fixed: H = 418 mm - D = 302 mm L (3/4 poles) [mm] 296/386 296/386<br />
Withdrawable : H = 461 mm - D = 396.5 mm L (3/4 poles) [mm] 324/414 324/414<br />
Weights (c.breaker complete with releases and CT, excluding accessoires)<br />
Fixed 3/4 Poles [kg] 42/50 46/55 46/55 45/53<br />
Withdrawable 3/4 Poles (including fixed part) [kg] 65/80 72/89 72/89 70/87<br />
(1) without intentional delays<br />
E1 B E2 B-N E2 L<br />
Rated uninterrupted current (at 40 °C), Iu<br />
Mechanical life<br />
[A] [A] 800 1250 1250 1600 2000 1250 1600<br />
with regular routine maintenance [No. operations x 1000] 25 25 25 25 25 20 20<br />
Frequency [Operations per hour] 60 60 60 60 60 60 60<br />
Electrical life (440 V ~) [No. operations x 1000] 10 10 15 12 10 4 3<br />
Frequency [Operations per hour] 30 30 30 30 30 20 20<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0276
<strong>Emax</strong>0288<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0301<br />
E3 E4 E6<br />
N S H L S H H V<br />
2500 1250 1250 2000 4000 3200 5000 3200<br />
3200 1600 1600 2500 4000 6300 4000<br />
2000 2000 5000<br />
2500 2500 6300<br />
3200 3200<br />
100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50<br />
65 75 100 130 75 100 100 150<br />
65 75 100 110 75 100 100 150<br />
65 75 85 85 75 85 (*) 100 100<br />
65 75 75 – 75 100 100 100<br />
65 75 85 130 75 100 100 125<br />
65 75 85 110 75 100 100 125<br />
65 75 85 65 75 85 (*) 100 100<br />
65 75 75 – 75 100 100 100<br />
65 75 75 15 75 100 100 100<br />
65 65 65 – 65 65 – –<br />
143 165 220 286 165 220 220 330<br />
143 165 220 242 165 220 220 330<br />
143 165 187 187 165 187 165 187<br />
B B B A B B B B<br />
• • • • • • • •<br />
• • • • • • • •<br />
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80<br />
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70<br />
30 30 30 12 30 30 30 30<br />
404/530 566/656 782/908<br />
432/558 594/684 810/936<br />
68/80 68/80 68/80 67/79 95/115 95/115 140/170 140/170<br />
100/125 100/125 100/125 100/120 147/190 147/190 210/260 210/260<br />
(*) The performance at 500 V is 100 kA<br />
E3 N-S-H E3 L E4 S-H E6 H-V<br />
1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 2000 2500 3200 4000 3200 4000 5000 6300<br />
20 20 20 20 20 15 15 15 15 12 12 12 12<br />
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60<br />
12 10 9 8 6 2 1,8 7 5 5 4 3 2<br />
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0314<br />
19
<strong>Emax</strong>0417 Construction characteristics<br />
20<br />
Structure<br />
The structure of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, which<br />
is made out of sheet steel, is extremely<br />
compact and allows the dimensions to<br />
be significantly reduced. Safety is increased<br />
by adopting double insulation<br />
for the live parts and total segregation<br />
between the phases.<br />
The dimensions are characterised by<br />
having the same height and depth for<br />
all the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in each version.
is suitable for installation in 500 mm deep<br />
switchboards. The width of 324 mm (up<br />
to 2000 A) for the withdrawable version<br />
allows the switchgear to be used in<br />
switchboard compartments 400 mm<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0418 The depth of the withdrawable version<br />
wide. These compact dimensions also<br />
allow them to replace any models of <strong>air</strong><br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> from earlier series.<br />
21
Construction characteristics<br />
GSEM0098<br />
GSEM0099<br />
22<br />
9<br />
10<br />
11<br />
9<br />
10<br />
11<br />
Selective <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
E1 E1 B, B, E2 E2 B-N, B-N, E3 E3 N-S-H, N-S-H, E4 E4 S-H, S-H, E6 E6 H-V<br />
H-V<br />
Current-limiting <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
E2 E2 L, L, E3 E3 L<br />
L<br />
8<br />
8<br />
7<br />
7<br />
6b 6a 5b<br />
5a<br />
6<br />
2<br />
4<br />
3<br />
1<br />
5<br />
2<br />
4<br />
3<br />
1<br />
Utilisation category (selective or currentlimiting<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>)<br />
The selective (not current-limiting) <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are classified<br />
in class B. It is important to know their Icw values in relation<br />
to any possible delayed operations in the event of short<strong>circuit</strong>s.<br />
Current-limiting <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> E2L and E3L belong to class<br />
A. The short-time current Icw is not very important for these<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> and is necessarily low due to the operating<br />
principle on which they are based. The fact that they belong to<br />
class A does not preclude the possibility of obtaining the necessary<br />
selectivity (e.g. current-type or time-type selectivity)<br />
within the Icw rated short-time withstand current thresholds.<br />
The special features of current-limiting <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are also<br />
worthy of emphasis. In fact, they allow:<br />
– significant reduction of the peak current in relation to the<br />
prospective value;<br />
– drastic limitation of the specific let-through energy (see the<br />
curves on page 49).<br />
The resultant benefits are:<br />
– a reduction in electrodynamic stresses;<br />
– a reduction in thermal stresses;<br />
– savings in the sizing of cables and busbars;<br />
– the possibility of coordination with other <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in<br />
the series for back-up protection or selectivity.<br />
1 Sheet steel supporting structure<br />
2 Current transformer for protection release<br />
3 Pole group insulating box<br />
4 Horizontal rear terminals<br />
5-5a Plates for fixed main contacts<br />
5b Plates for fixed arc-breaking contacts<br />
6-6a Plates for moving main contacts<br />
6b Plates for moving arc-breaking contacts<br />
7 Arcing chamber<br />
8 Terminal box for fixed version - Sliding contacts for<br />
withdrawable version<br />
9 Protection release<br />
10 Closing and opening control of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
11 Closing springs
<strong>Emax</strong>0337<br />
7<br />
8<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
9<br />
6<br />
5<br />
4<br />
Fixed parts of<br />
withdrawable<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
The fixed parts of withdrawable<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> have<br />
shutters for segregating the<br />
fixed contacts when the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
is withdrawn<br />
from the compartment.<br />
These can be locked in their<br />
closed position using padlock<br />
devices.<br />
1 Sheet steel supporting<br />
structure<br />
2 Single earthing pliers<br />
mounted on the left for E1,<br />
E2 and E3, double earthing<br />
pliers for E4 and E6.<br />
3 Safety shutters (degree of<br />
protection IP20)<br />
4 Terminal supporting<br />
insulating base<br />
5 Terminals (rear, front or<br />
flat)<br />
6 Contacts signalling<br />
connected, isolated,<br />
isolated for test (to order)<br />
7 Sliding contacts<br />
8 Padlock device for safety<br />
shutters (to order)<br />
9 Fixing points (4 for E1, E2,<br />
E3 and 6 for E4, E6)<br />
23
<strong>Emax</strong>0365<br />
Construction characteristics<br />
Operating mechanism<br />
The operating mechanism is of the stored energy type, operated<br />
using pre-charged springs.<br />
The springs are charged manually by operating the front<br />
lever or using a geared motor, supplied on request.<br />
The opening springs are charged automatically during the closing<br />
operation.<br />
With the operating mechanism fitted with shunt closing and<br />
opening releases and the geared motor for charging the<br />
springs, the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker can be operated by remote control<br />
and, if required, co-ordinated by a supervision and control<br />
system.<br />
The following operating cycles are possible without recharging<br />
the springs:<br />
– starting with the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open and the springs<br />
charged: closing-opening<br />
– starting with the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker closed and the springs<br />
charged: opening-closing-opening.<br />
The same operating mechanism is used for the entire series<br />
and is fitted with a mechanical and electrical anti-pumping<br />
device.<br />
24<br />
I<br />
O<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0366 <strong>Emax</strong>0340<br />
O<br />
I<br />
O
<strong>Emax</strong>0326 <strong>Emax</strong>0325<br />
Fixed version<br />
2<br />
1<br />
3<br />
5<br />
7<br />
9<br />
Withdrawable version<br />
15<br />
2<br />
1<br />
11<br />
5<br />
7<br />
9<br />
12<br />
14<br />
4<br />
6<br />
8<br />
10<br />
3<br />
4<br />
6<br />
8<br />
10<br />
13<br />
Operating and signalling<br />
parts<br />
1 Trade-mark and model of <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
2 <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 or PR112 release<br />
3 Pushbutton for manual opening<br />
operation<br />
4 Pushbutton for manual closing<br />
operation<br />
5 Lever for manual closing spring<br />
charging<br />
6 Electrical rating plate<br />
7 Mechanical signalling device for <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
open “O” and closed “I”<br />
8 Signal for springs charged or<br />
discharged<br />
9 Mechanical signal for protection<br />
release tripped<br />
10 Operation counter<br />
11 Key lock in open position<br />
12 Key lock and padlock in isolatedwithdrawn<br />
position<br />
13 Devices for the racking-in/racking-out<br />
operations<br />
14 Terminal box (only for fixed version)<br />
15 Sliding contacts (only for withdrawable<br />
version)<br />
25
<strong>Emax</strong>0365<br />
Identification of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
26<br />
GSEM0005x<br />
E<br />
Where the dimensions of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
are concerned, they are divided into four<br />
sizes, each with the same external dimensions.<br />
There is one model in each size, with<br />
Series Model Rated ultimate short-<strong>circuit</strong><br />
breaking capacity (480V a.c.)<br />
B<br />
N<br />
S<br />
H<br />
V<br />
L<br />
40 kA / selective<br />
65 kA / selective<br />
75 kA / selective<br />
100 kA / selective<br />
150 kA / selective<br />
130 kA / limiting<br />
For example, code <strong>SACE</strong> E3 N 25 identifies a <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker in series E with<br />
the following electrical specifications:<br />
Model 3, Icu = 65 kA, Iu = 2500 A.<br />
the exception of size 1, which has two sizes<br />
with different electrical specifications.<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are identified using the<br />
following code:<br />
Rated uninterrupted<br />
current<br />
08<br />
12<br />
16<br />
20<br />
25<br />
32<br />
40<br />
50<br />
63<br />
800 A<br />
1250 A<br />
1600 A<br />
2000 A<br />
2500 A<br />
3200 A<br />
4000 A<br />
5000 A<br />
6300 A<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0349
Versions and connections<br />
All the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are available in fixed and withdrawable<br />
three and four-pole versions.<br />
Each model of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker has terminals made of silverplated<br />
copper bars which have the same dimensions irrespective<br />
of the rated currents of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
The fixed parts of each model of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
are the same for every rated current and breaking capacity<br />
of the related moving parts.<br />
GSEM0009<br />
GSEM0006<br />
HORIZONTAL REAR<br />
TERMINALS<br />
HORIZONTAL REAR<br />
TERMINALS<br />
FIXED CIRCUIT-BREAKERS<br />
GSEM0010<br />
GSEM0007<br />
VERTICAL REAR<br />
TERMINALS<br />
VERTICAL REAR<br />
TERMINALS<br />
A solution with gold-plated terminals is available for special<br />
needs involving the use of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in corrosive<br />
environments. The fact that different types of terminals are<br />
available makes it possible to build switchboards that can be<br />
mounted against walls or accessed from the rear with rear<br />
connections.<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> can be fitted with different combinations<br />
of top and bottom terminals to meet special installation needs.<br />
GSEM0011<br />
GSEM0008<br />
FRONT<br />
TERMINALS<br />
WITHDRAWABLE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS<br />
FRONT<br />
TERMINALS<br />
GSEM0012<br />
FLAT<br />
TERMINALS<br />
27
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 microprocessor-based<br />
overcurrent releases<br />
The overcurrent protection for alternating<br />
current installations is provided by<br />
two types of microprocessor-based releases<br />
in the <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112<br />
series which can be installed as alternatives<br />
on <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>:<br />
• <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 with protection functions<br />
only<br />
• <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 with protection, current<br />
measuring and dialogue functions.<br />
The protection units can be three-phase<br />
or three-phase with neutral depending<br />
on the type of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker used (three<br />
pole, three-pole with external neutral or<br />
four pole).<br />
The protection unit comprises:<br />
• 3 or 4 current transformers (CT) depending<br />
on the number of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
poles; the fourth CT may be<br />
external<br />
• one protection unit which can be either<br />
a <strong>SACE</strong> PR111/P or PR112/P<br />
• an opening solenoid which acts directly<br />
on the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker operating<br />
mechanism (always supplied with the<br />
protection unit).<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release is available<br />
with a dialogue unit, to be specified on<br />
ordering, for remote control and communication<br />
with a centralised system. The<br />
protection and dialogue unit thus takes<br />
the code <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD.<br />
The main characteristics of these microprocessor-based<br />
releases are:<br />
• operation without the need for an external<br />
power supply<br />
• microprocessor technology (8 bit for<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and 16 bit for <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112)<br />
• high precision<br />
• sensitive to the true r.m.s. value of the<br />
current<br />
28<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0359<br />
• neutral normally set to 50% of the setting<br />
for the phases, with the possibility<br />
of setting it to 100% (to order on<br />
E1, E2, E3 and E4 only).<br />
The main performances which distinguish<br />
the releases are indicated in the<br />
following table.
Protection functions<br />
Overload protection with inverse<br />
long time-delay trip<br />
Selective short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection with inverse<br />
or definite short time-delay trip<br />
Instantaneous short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection with<br />
adjustable trip current setting<br />
Earth fault protection<br />
Thermal memory for functions L and S<br />
Measurements<br />
Currents (in phases, in neutral, of earth fault)<br />
Events marked with moment when they occur<br />
Events stored in chronological order<br />
Counting of number of operations and contact wear<br />
Residual<br />
Remote setting of protection function, unit configuration<br />
and communication parameters<br />
Transmission of measurements, states and alarms from<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to system<br />
Transmission of events and maintenance data from<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to system<br />
Alarm and release due to release temperature rise<br />
Alarm due to microprocessor fault<br />
Parameters set using DIP switches<br />
Parameters set using keys and liquid crystal display<br />
Source ground return<br />
Event marking and data storage<br />
Communication with centralised supervision<br />
and control system (using dialogue unit)<br />
Self-test<br />
User interface<br />
Alarm signals for functions L and S<br />
Complete management of pre-alarms and alarms for<br />
all protection and self-monitoring functions<br />
Enabling key for use in “READ” (consultation) or “EDIT”<br />
(consultation and setting) mode<br />
Load control (with auxiliary unit)<br />
Connection-disconnection of loads in relation to the current passing<br />
through the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Zone selectivity<br />
Can be activated for protection functions S and G<br />
Mini0351<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111<br />
Mini0350<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
29
<strong>Emax</strong>0327 Mini0351<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 microprocessor-based<br />
overcurrent releases<br />
Overcurrent release<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
Mini0350 Versions available<br />
30<br />
PR111/P PR111/P PR111/P<br />
PR112/P PR112/P PR112/PD PR112/PD
CURRENT TRANSFORMER SETTINGS (In)<br />
C.Breaker Rated<br />
type current (Iu) R250 R400 R800 R1250 R1600 R2000 R2500 R3200 R4000 R5000 R6300<br />
E1B 800 A<br />
1250 A<br />
E2B 1600 A<br />
2000 A<br />
E2N 1250 A<br />
1600 A<br />
2000 A<br />
E2L 1250 A<br />
1600 A<br />
E3N 2500 A<br />
3200 A<br />
E3S 1250 A<br />
E3H 1600 A<br />
2000 A<br />
2500 A<br />
3200 A<br />
E3L 2000 A<br />
2500 A<br />
E4S 4000 A<br />
E4H 3200 A<br />
4000 A<br />
E6H 5000 A<br />
6300 A<br />
E6V 3200 A<br />
4000 A<br />
5000 A<br />
6300 A<br />
31
Derived versions<br />
The derived versions are available for all the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
models. They are identified by the code of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
from which they are derived, completed with the code for their<br />
related versions.<br />
The dimensions are the same as those of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
on which they are based.<br />
32<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0296<br />
Code of derived version<br />
Switch- Isolating Earthing switch Earthing<br />
disconnector truck with making capacity truck<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0328<br />
MS CS MTP MT<br />
E1 E1 B/MS E1/CS 12 E1/MTP E1/MT<br />
E2 E2 B-N/MS E2/CS 20 E2/MTP E2/MT<br />
E3 E3 N-S/MS E3/CS 32 E3/MTP E3/MT<br />
E4 E4 S-H/MS E4/CS 40 E4/MTP E4/MT<br />
E6 E6 H/MS E6/CS 63 E6/MTP E6/MT<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0329<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0330
Switch-disconnector MS<br />
This version differs from its related<br />
automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker solely in not<br />
having an overcurrent release fitted.<br />
The switch-disconnectors are available<br />
both in fixed and withdrawable versions.<br />
The electrical characteristics of the<br />
switch-disconnectors are shown in the<br />
table below (to IEC standards 947-3).<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0335<br />
E1 B E2 B E2 N E3 N E3 S E4 S E4 H E6 H<br />
MS MS MS MS MS MS MS MS<br />
Rated current Iu (40 °C) [A] 800 1600 1250 2500 1250 4000 3200 5000<br />
1250 2000 1600 3200 1600 4000 6300<br />
2000 2000<br />
2500<br />
3200<br />
Rated service<br />
<strong>voltage</strong><br />
Ue 50-60 Hz<br />
[V~]<br />
[V –]<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
690<br />
250<br />
Rated insulation<br />
<strong>voltage</strong><br />
Ui [V~] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000<br />
Rated impulse<br />
withstand <strong>voltage</strong><br />
Rated<br />
Uimp [kV] 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12<br />
short-time Icw (1 s) [kA] 36 40 55 65 75 75 100 100<br />
withstand current (3 s) [kA] – 40 40 65 65 65 65 –<br />
Rated making<br />
capacity<br />
(peak value)<br />
Icm 220…440V~ [kA]<br />
500…690V~ [kA]<br />
75,6<br />
75,6<br />
84<br />
84<br />
121<br />
121<br />
143<br />
143<br />
165<br />
165<br />
165<br />
165<br />
220<br />
187<br />
220<br />
187<br />
33
Derived versions<br />
34<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0355<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0356<br />
Isolating truck - CS<br />
withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, with all the<br />
Earthing switch with making capacity - MTP<br />
This version is based on the moving part<br />
of the corresponding withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
without the overcurrent releases<br />
and with the top or bottom isolating<br />
contacts replaced by connections<br />
that short <strong>circuit</strong> the phases through the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to earth. The earthing<br />
switch with making capacity is available<br />
with top or bottom isolating contacts.<br />
Earthing truck - MT<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0357 This version is derived from the related<br />
This version is similar to the isolating<br />
truck, with the exception that the bottom<br />
or top isolating contacts are replaced<br />
with connections that are connected in<br />
a short <strong>circuit</strong> and earthed. The earthing<br />
truck is available with bottom or top<br />
isolating contacts to suit the fixed part<br />
of the model.<br />
breaking and operating mechanism<br />
parts replaced by simple connections<br />
between the top and bottom contacts.<br />
It is used as a no-load isolator in cases<br />
where this use is envisaged in the installation.<br />
The earthing <strong>circuit</strong> is sized for a shorttime<br />
current equal to 60% of the maximum<br />
Icw of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker on which<br />
it is based (IEC 439-1).<br />
The earthing switch is inserted in the<br />
fixed part of a withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
to earth the top or bottom terminals<br />
before carrying out inspection or<br />
maintenance operations on the external<br />
<strong>circuit</strong> in safe conditions. It should be<br />
used in cases where earthing of installations<br />
with residual or recovery <strong>voltage</strong>s<br />
could occur.<br />
The earthing <strong>circuit</strong> is sized for a shorttime<br />
current equal to 60% of the maximum<br />
Icw of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker it is<br />
based on (IEC 439-1).<br />
The truck is temporarily racked into the<br />
fixed part of a withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
to earth the top or bottom terminals<br />
before carrying out maintenance<br />
operations on the external <strong>circuit</strong> when<br />
no residual <strong>voltage</strong>s are envisaged.
<strong>Emax</strong>0358<br />
Special versions<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> for <strong>voltage</strong>s up to 1000V in alternating current<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> can be supplied,<br />
in the special version, for rated<br />
service <strong>voltage</strong>s up to 1000V in alternating<br />
current.<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in this version are<br />
three-pole and four-pole version.<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong>/E <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are particularly<br />
suitable for installation in mines,<br />
petrochemical plants and for traction.<br />
The table below shows the electrical<br />
characteristics of the range.<br />
Interruttore E2B/E E2N/E E3H/E E4H/E<br />
Rated uninterrupted<br />
current<br />
Iu [A] 1600 2000 1250 1600 2000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 3200 4000<br />
Rated service Ue [V] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000<br />
<strong>voltage</strong><br />
Rated ultimate breaking<br />
capacity under short-<strong>circuit</strong> Icu [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 65 65<br />
Rated service breaking<br />
capacity under short-<strong>circuit</strong> Ics [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 65 65<br />
Rated short-time<br />
withstand current Icw [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 65 65<br />
Other versions<br />
On request, <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
can be provided in special versions<br />
suitable for particularly aggressive<br />
ambients (SO 2 /H 2 S) and for anti-seismic<br />
installations.<br />
defined with the abbreviation of the<br />
standard range (rated service <strong>voltage</strong> up<br />
to 690V a.c.) plus “/E” and are derived<br />
from the corresponding standard <strong>SACE</strong><br />
<strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> of which they keep<br />
the versions and accessories.<br />
The range of <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
for applications up to 1000V in alternating<br />
current is available in the fixed<br />
and withdrawable version, both in the<br />
35
Accessories<br />
36<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0264<br />
E1 … E6 E1 … E6<br />
Automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker Switch-disconnector<br />
Version<br />
Shunt opening/closing release<br />
Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable<br />
SOR Test Unit<br />
Under<strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
Delay device for under<strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
Geared motor for automatic charging<br />
of closing springs<br />
Mechanical signal<br />
of overcurrent releases<br />
Mechanical and electrical signal<br />
of overcurrent releases tripped<br />
Electrical signal for <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
open/closed<br />
Electrical signal for <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
connected/isolated for test/isolated<br />
Contact for signalling<br />
closing springs charged<br />
Contact for signalling<br />
under<strong>voltage</strong> release energised<br />
Current transformer for the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
external neutral conductor<br />
Homopolar toroid for the earthing conductor<br />
of the main power supply<br />
Terminal box for fixed version <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Sliding contacts for withdrawable<br />
version <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Mechanical operation counter<br />
Key lock or padlock devices in open position<br />
Circuit-breaker lock in connected-isolated<br />
for test-isolated position<br />
Anti-insertion lock for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
of different models<br />
Padlock devices for fixed part shutters<br />
Compartment door mechanical lock<br />
Protection for opening and<br />
closing pushbuttons<br />
IP54 door protection<br />
Interlock between <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
Lifting plate<br />
Racking out crank handle<br />
Flange for compartment door<br />
= optional<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0267<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0266<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0269<br />
= accessory supplied as standard
CONTENTS<br />
Installation in switchboards<br />
Installation in switchboards 38<br />
Change in the rated uninterrupted current<br />
in relation to temperature 42<br />
Derating in altitude 48<br />
Current-limiting and specific let-through energy<br />
curves for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> E2L - E3L 49<br />
37
Modular design<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series have been made<br />
following modular design criteria to facilitate their installation<br />
and integration in L.V. electrical switchboards, giving them the<br />
same depth and height for every model while simultaneously<br />
achieving a significant reduction in their overall installation dimensions.<br />
Furthermore, the front metal shield of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is identical<br />
for the entire series. This simplifies the construction of the<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0334 Installation in switchboards<br />
38<br />
switchboard doors since only one type of drilling is required<br />
and makes the front of the switchboard the same for all sizes.<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are suitable for Power Centre<br />
switchboards and make it easy to comply with the segregation<br />
requirements of the IEC 439-1 and CEI EN 60439-1 Standards.
Number of poles<br />
The choice of the number of poles for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> which<br />
simultaneously provide switching, protection and isolation functions<br />
in three phase installations depends on the type of electrical<br />
system (TT, TN-S, TN-C, IT) and the type of user or, more<br />
generally, whether it features a distributed or non-distributed<br />
neutral.<br />
THREE-POLE<br />
PEN L1 L2 L3<br />
CIRCUIT-BREAKERS<br />
For TN-C systems (interruption<br />
of the neutral is not admissible<br />
because it also acts<br />
as the protection conductor).<br />
For users that do not use the<br />
neutral (e.g.: asynchronous<br />
motors) and, generally, for<br />
lines without neutral (non-distributed<br />
neutral).<br />
PE<br />
L1 L2 L3<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0331 Choosing the type of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111-PR112<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111-PR112<br />
FOUR-POLE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS<br />
In all other cases, with exceptions<br />
for the IT system<br />
(see CEI Standards 64-8/<br />
473.3.2.2).<br />
Current transformers can be<br />
installed on the external neutral<br />
of five-wire systems (TN-<br />
S) with 3-pole <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
PE<br />
PE<br />
N L1 L2 L3<br />
THREE-POLE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS WITH EXTERNAL<br />
NEUTRAL<br />
N L1 L2 L3<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111-PR112<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111-PR112<br />
Fixed or withdrawable<br />
version<br />
The fixed version of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
has more compact<br />
dimensions than the<br />
withdrawable version. It is<br />
recommended for installations<br />
that can tolerate service<br />
interruptions in the event<br />
of faults or routine maintenance.<br />
The withdrawable version of<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is recommended<br />
for:<br />
– applications that can only<br />
tolerate brief interruptions<br />
due to faults or routine<br />
maintenance:<br />
– dual lines, one of which is<br />
a standby for the other, with<br />
a single <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker for<br />
each p<strong>air</strong>.<br />
39
Installation in switchboards<br />
Connecting the main <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>s<br />
When designing switchboards, one must<br />
always bear in mind the problem of making<br />
the most rational connections between<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker and main<br />
busbar system and the busbars to the<br />
users. The <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series offers<br />
switchboard experts a range of options<br />
to satisfy different <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker connection<br />
requirements.<br />
The figures at the side show a number<br />
of indications for terminal selection.<br />
Degrees of protection<br />
A number of solutions have been<br />
adopted on <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
to achieve degree of protection IP22<br />
for fixed or withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
excluding their terminals, and IP30<br />
for their front parts using a flange. Automatic<br />
shutters have been designed for<br />
the fixed parts of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
which can be locked using<br />
padlock devices to allow maintenance<br />
of the load side or power-supply side of<br />
the fixed part.<br />
40<br />
Horizontal rear terminals - For switchboards<br />
with access from the rear<br />
Front terminals - For switchboards<br />
mounted on walls with access from<br />
the front only<br />
In addition, a transparent protective<br />
cover is available on request, which<br />
completely segregates the front part of<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, taking the degree of<br />
protection to IP54 while still leaving the<br />
front panel and protection release with<br />
its related indications fully visible.<br />
IP22 Fixed or withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>breaker,<br />
excluding terminals.<br />
IP30 Front parts of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (using<br />
flange).<br />
IP54 Fixed or withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
fitted with transparent protective<br />
cover to be fixed on the front<br />
of the switchboard (on request).<br />
ASEM0031<br />
ASEM0033<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0338<br />
Vertical rear terminals - For switchboards<br />
with access from the rear<br />
Flat rear (only withdrawable version)<br />
- For switchboards with access from<br />
the rear<br />
ASEM0032<br />
ASEM0034
The IEC 439-1 and CEI EN 60439-1 Standards prescribe calculations<br />
for determining the heat dissipation of ANS (nonstandard)<br />
switchboards which require the designer to consider<br />
the following:<br />
– the overall dimensions<br />
– the rated current of the busbars and connections and their<br />
related power loss values<br />
– the power loss of the switchgear fitted in the switchboard.<br />
The following table provides information on the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
Where other equipment is concerned, please consult the<br />
catalogues of the relative manufacturers.<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0342 Power loss<br />
C.-breaker Iu<br />
Power loss<br />
Fixed Withdrawable<br />
3/4 Poles 3/4 Poles<br />
[A] [W] [W]<br />
E1 B 800 65 95<br />
1250 150 230<br />
E2 B-N 1250 70 130<br />
1600 115 215<br />
2000 180 330<br />
E2 L 1250 105 165<br />
1600 170 265<br />
E3 N-S-H 1250 60 90<br />
1600 85 150<br />
2000 130 225<br />
2500 205 350<br />
3200 330 570<br />
E3 L 2000 215 330<br />
2500 335 515<br />
E4 S-H 3200 235 425<br />
4000 360 660<br />
E6 H-V 3200 170 290<br />
4000 265 445<br />
5000 415 700<br />
6300 650 1100<br />
Note<br />
The same Standards prescribe type tests for AS<br />
switchboards (standard factory-manufactured<br />
switchgear), including those for maximum<br />
temperature rise.<br />
41
Change in the rated uninterrupted current<br />
in relation to temperature<br />
Temperature derating of <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> can operate at higher temperatures than<br />
their reference temperature (40 °C) in certain installation conditions.<br />
In these cases the current-carrying capacity of the<br />
switchgear should be reduced.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series of <strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> uses microprocessor-based<br />
electronic releases that offer the benefit of great<br />
operating stability when subjected to temperature changes.<br />
The tables below show the current-carrying capacities of the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (as absolute values and percentage values)<br />
in relation to their rated values at T = 40 °C.<br />
42<br />
Iu [A]<br />
1400<br />
1200<br />
1000<br />
800<br />
600<br />
400<br />
200<br />
0<br />
E1 1250<br />
E1 800<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1<br />
Temperature E1 800 E1 1250<br />
[°C] % [A] % [A]<br />
10 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
20 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
30 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
35 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
40 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
45 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
50 100% 800 100% 1250<br />
55 100% 800 97% 1207<br />
60 100% 800 93% 1163<br />
65 100% 800 89% 1118<br />
70 100% 800 86% 1075<br />
10 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70<br />
T [°C]
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
Temperature E2 1250 E2 1600 E2 2000<br />
[°C] % [A] % [A] % [A]<br />
10 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000<br />
20 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000<br />
30 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000<br />
35 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000<br />
40 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000<br />
45 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000<br />
50 100% 1250 100% 1600 96% 1920<br />
55 100% 1250 99% 1580 92% 1840<br />
60 100% 1250 98% 1560 88% 1760<br />
65 100% 1250 96% 1538 84% 1680<br />
70 100% 1250 95% 1515 80% 1600<br />
Iu [A]<br />
3500<br />
3000<br />
2500<br />
2000<br />
1500<br />
1000<br />
500<br />
0<br />
E2 2000<br />
E2 1600<br />
E2 1250<br />
10 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70<br />
T [°C]<br />
43
Change in the rated uninterrupted current<br />
in relation to temperature<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
Temperature E3 1250 E3 1600 E3 2000 E3 2500 E3 3200<br />
[C°] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A]<br />
10 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 100% 3200<br />
20 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 100% 3200<br />
30 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 100% 3200<br />
35 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 100% 3200<br />
40 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 100% 3200<br />
45 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 100% 3200<br />
50 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 2000 100% 2500 96% 3066<br />
55 100% 1250 100% 1600 100% 1990 98% 2450 92% 2932<br />
60 100% 1250 100% 1600 99% 1980 96% 2400 87% 2798<br />
65 100% 1250 100% 1600 98% 1965 93% 2320 83% 2664<br />
70 100% 1250 100% 1600 98% 1950 90% 2240 79% 2528<br />
44<br />
Iu [A]<br />
3500<br />
3000<br />
2500<br />
2000<br />
1500<br />
1000<br />
500<br />
0<br />
E3 3200<br />
E3 2500<br />
E3 2000<br />
E3 1600<br />
E3 1250<br />
10 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70<br />
T [°C]
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4<br />
Temperature E4 3200 E4 4000<br />
[°C] % [A] % [A]<br />
10 100% 3200 100% 4000<br />
20 100% 3200 100% 4000<br />
30 100% 3200 100% 4000<br />
35 100% 3200 100% 4000<br />
40 100% 3200 100% 4000<br />
45 100% 3200 100% 4000<br />
50 98% 3130 96% 3824<br />
55 96% 3060 91% 3648<br />
60 93% 2990 87% 3472<br />
65 91% 2915 82% 3296<br />
70 89% 2840 78% 3120<br />
Iu [A]<br />
7000<br />
6000<br />
5000<br />
4000<br />
3000<br />
2000<br />
1000<br />
0<br />
E4 4000<br />
E4 3200<br />
10 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70<br />
T [°C]<br />
45
Change in the rated uninterrupted current<br />
in relation to temperature<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6<br />
Temperature E6 3200 E6 4000 E6 5000 E6 6300<br />
[°C] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A]<br />
10 100% 3200 100% 4000 100% 5000 100% 6300<br />
20 100% 3200 100% 4000 100% 5000 100% 6300<br />
30 100% 3200 100% 4000 100% 5000 100% 6300<br />
35 100% 3200 100% 4000 100% 5000 100% 6300<br />
40 100% 3200 100% 4000 100% 5000 100% 6300<br />
45 100% 3200 100% 4000 100% 5000 100% 6300<br />
50 100% 3200 100% 4000 99% 4960 95% 6010<br />
55 100% 3200 99% 3975 97% 4845 91% 5720<br />
60 100% 3200 99% 3950 95% 4730 86% 5430<br />
65 100% 3200 98% 3915 92% 4620 82% 5140<br />
70 100% 3200 97% 3880 90% 4510 77% 4851<br />
46<br />
Iu [A]<br />
7000<br />
6000<br />
5000<br />
4000<br />
3000<br />
2000<br />
1000<br />
0<br />
E6 6300<br />
E6 5000<br />
E6 4000<br />
E6 3200<br />
10 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70<br />
T [°C]
As an example, the table below shows the referred values of<br />
the rated uninterrupted current at continuous current-carrying<br />
capacity in a switchboard.<br />
These values a given as an example and refer to apparatus in<br />
the withdrawable version installed in a non-segregated switchboard<br />
with IP20 degree of protection.<br />
The values refer to a maximum temperature on the terminals of<br />
120 °C.<br />
For <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with 6300 A rated current, the use of vertical<br />
rear terminals is recommended.<br />
Vertical Terminals Horizontal and Front Terminals<br />
[A] [% di Iu] [mm2 ] [% di Iu] [mm2 Type Iu Continuous current- Busbar Continuous current- Busbar<br />
carrying capacity cross-section carrying capacity cross-section<br />
]<br />
E1B08 800 100 1x(60x10) 100 1x(60x10)<br />
E1B12 1250 100 1x(80x10) 100 2x(60x8)<br />
E2N12 1250 100 1x(60x10) 100 1x(60x10)<br />
E2B/N16 1600 100 2x(60x10) 100 2x(60x10)<br />
E2B/N20 2000 100 3x(60x10) 93 3x(60x10)<br />
E2L12 1250 100 1x(60x10) 100 1x(60x10)<br />
E2L16 1600 100 2x(60x10) 100 2x(60x10)<br />
E3S/H12 1250 100 1x(60x10) 100 1x(60x10)<br />
E3S/H16 1600 100 1x(100x10) 100 1x(100x10)<br />
E3S/H20 2000 100 2x(100x10) 100 2x(100x10)<br />
E3N/S/H25 2500 100 2x(100x10) 97 2x(100x10)<br />
E3N/S/H32 3200 95 3x(100x10) 90 3x(100x10)<br />
E3L20 2000 100 2x(100x10) 100 2x(100x10)<br />
E3L25 2500 100 2x(100x10) 95 2x(100x10)<br />
E4H32 3200 100 3x(100x10) 100 3x(100x10)<br />
E4S/H40 4000 95 4x(100x10) 90 6x(60x10)<br />
E6V32 3200 100 3x(100x10) 100 3x(100x10)<br />
E6V40 4000 100 4x(100x10) 100 4x(100x10)<br />
E6H/V50 5000 100 6x(100x10) 97 6x(100x10)<br />
E6H/V63 6300 93 7x(100x10) — 6x(100x10)<br />
47
Derating in altitude<br />
Up to a height of 2000 metres, the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
do not undergo any changes in their rated performance.<br />
As the altitude increases their atmospheric properties alter in<br />
terms of composition, dielectric capacity, cooling power and<br />
pressure.<br />
The performance of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> therefore undergoes<br />
Altitude H [m]
Current-limiting and specific let-through energy<br />
curves for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> E2L and E3L<br />
I2t [A2s x 106 The current-limiting capacity of an automatic current-limiting<br />
GSSC0423<br />
]<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker indicates its level of ability to let through or make<br />
a current lower than the prospective fault current in short-<strong>circuit</strong><br />
conditions. This characteristic of an automatic current-limiting<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is represented by two different curves which<br />
indicate the following respectively:<br />
– the value of the specific energy “I 2 t” (in A 2 s) let through by<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker in relation to the uninterrupted symmetrical<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> current.<br />
– the peak value (in kA) of the limited current in relation to the<br />
uninterrupted symmetrical short-<strong>circuit</strong> current.<br />
Specific let-through energy curves<br />
Is [kA]<br />
ls prospective symmetrical short-<strong>circuit</strong> current<br />
lp peak current<br />
l2t specific let-through energy at the <strong>voltage</strong>s indicated<br />
A curves for maximum peak currents made (limited) at the <strong>voltage</strong>s indicated<br />
B prospective maximum peak current curve (not limited)<br />
GSEM002<br />
GSSC0422<br />
Ip [kA]<br />
A Icc of limited peak<br />
B prospective Icc (peak value)<br />
Current-limiting curves<br />
Is [kA]<br />
49
CONTENTS<br />
Overcurrent releases and relative<br />
accessories<br />
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR111<br />
microprocessor-based releases 52<br />
Trip curves of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 releases 56<br />
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
microprocessor-based release 58<br />
Trip curves of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker with<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR112 releases 62<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K signalling unit 67<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T configuration test unit 68<br />
51
<strong>Emax</strong>0351<br />
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR111<br />
microprocessor-based releases<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111 release<br />
This is the basic release for the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series. The complete<br />
range of protection functions and the variety of thresholds<br />
and trip times offered make it suitable for protecting any<br />
Caption<br />
52<br />
1 2 3<br />
6 7 8 12 13 15 16 20<br />
5 4 11 9 10 14 18 17 19<br />
1 Alarm signal LED for protection function L<br />
2 DIP switches for setting current threshold I1<br />
3 Indication of the DIP switch positions for the values of current<br />
thresholds I1<br />
4 DIP switches for setting trip time t1 (type of curve)<br />
5 Indication of the DIP switch positions for the time settings<br />
6 Alarm signal LED for protection function S<br />
7 DIP switches for setting current threshold I2<br />
8 Indication of the DIP switch positions for the values of current<br />
thresholds I2<br />
9 DIP switches for setting trip time t2 (type of curve)<br />
10 DIP switches for setting inverse time or definite time<br />
characteristic<br />
11 Indication of DIP switch positions for time settings<br />
type of alternating current installation. The release does not<br />
have any additional functions over and above its protection<br />
functions except some number signals.<br />
12 DIP switches for setting current threshold I3<br />
13 Indication of the DIP switch positions for the values of current<br />
thresholds I3<br />
14 Rating plate showing the rated current of the neutral CT and the<br />
release serial number<br />
15 DIP switches for setting current threshold I4<br />
16 Indication of the DIP switch positions for the values of current<br />
thresholds I4<br />
17 DIP switches for setting trip time t4 (type of curve)<br />
18 Indication of DIP switch positions for time settings<br />
19 Symbol diagram showing operation of function G<br />
20 Connection module with external units for testing the release and<br />
socket for connection to the trip test (<strong>SACE</strong> TT1 unit and <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR010/T unit)
GSEM0064<br />
Operation and protection functions<br />
t = k<br />
t = k<br />
I 2<br />
Power supply<br />
The release does not require an external power supply, being<br />
self-powered using the current transformers installed on the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker. For it to operate, it is sufficient for at least one<br />
phase to be loaded at 18% of the rated current of the current<br />
transformers (In).<br />
Protection functions<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 release offers the following protection functions:<br />
• overload (L)<br />
• selective short-<strong>circuit</strong> (S)<br />
• instantaneous short-<strong>circuit</strong> (I)<br />
• earth fault (G).<br />
See the following section for the range of settings available.<br />
Overload (L)<br />
The inverse long time-delay trip overload protection L is of the<br />
type I2t = k. Eight current thresholds and 4 curves indicated by<br />
the letters A, B, C, D are available. Each curve is identified by<br />
the trip time in relation to the current I = 6 x I1 (I1 = threshold<br />
set).<br />
GSEM0065<br />
Selective short-<strong>circuit</strong> (S)<br />
The inverse short time-delay trip or definite short time-delay<br />
trip short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection S can be set with two different types<br />
of curves with a trip time that is independent of the current<br />
(t=k) or with a constant specific let-through energy (t = k/I2 ).<br />
Seven current thresholds and 4 curves indicated by the letters<br />
A, B, C, D are available. Each curve is identified as follows:<br />
– for curves (t = k) by the trip time for I > I2<br />
– for curves t = k/I 2 by the trip time for I = 8 x In (In = rated<br />
current of the current transformer).<br />
The function can be excluded by setting the DIP switches to<br />
the combination indicated by “OFF”.<br />
Adjustable instantaneous short-<strong>circuit</strong> (I)<br />
Protection function I offers 7 tripping thresholds and can be<br />
excluded (“OFF” position of the DIP switches).<br />
Earth fault (G)<br />
The inverse short time-delay trip earth fault protection G (which<br />
can be excluded) offers 7 current thresholds and 4 curves indicated<br />
by the letters A, B, C, D. Each curve is identified by<br />
the time t4 in relation to current I4 as shown in the diagram on<br />
the front of the release (detail 19 on page 52)<br />
53
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR111<br />
microprocessor-based release<br />
Interface with the<br />
user<br />
The user communicates with<br />
the release in the trip parameter<br />
preparation stage by<br />
means of the dip switches<br />
described in the previous<br />
paragraph.<br />
Two LEDs (detail 1 and 6 on<br />
page 52) are also available<br />
for alarm signalling (start of<br />
timing) for the L and S functions<br />
respectively.<br />
Setting neutral<br />
Protection of the neutral is<br />
available at 50% in the standard<br />
version or at 100% (version<br />
which can be supplied<br />
on request for E1-E2-E3) of<br />
the rated current and of the<br />
phases.<br />
Test function<br />
The Test function is carried<br />
out by means of the pocketsized<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> TT1 Trip Test unit,<br />
fitted with a two-pole polarised<br />
connector housed on<br />
the bottom of the box, which<br />
allows the device to be connected<br />
to the TEST input<br />
socket on the front of <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR111/P releases.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> TT1 unit allows the<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111/P release trip to<br />
be checked and the opening<br />
solenoid trip test.<br />
The device is supplied by<br />
means of a 12V replaceable<br />
battery.<br />
54<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0351 <strong>Emax</strong>0353<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0352<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0413<br />
Versions available<br />
The versions available are as follows:<br />
A complete test of the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR111/P microprocessorbased<br />
electronic release can<br />
be carried out using the special<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T apparatus<br />
by applying it to the TEST<br />
connector.<br />
All the release functions can<br />
be checked by means of this<br />
unit.
Protection functions and setting values of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 release<br />
Function Current thresholds Trip time Can be excluded Relation<br />
t = f (I)<br />
Overload I1 = 0.4 x In With current NO t = k/I 2<br />
protection 0.5 x In I = 6 x I1:<br />
0.6 x In t1 = 3 s (curve A)<br />
0.7 x In 6 s (curve B)<br />
0.8 x In 12 s (curve C)<br />
0.9 x In 18 s (curve D)<br />
0.95 x In<br />
1 x In<br />
Selective I2 = 1 x In With current YES t = k/I 2 (time-current curves I 2 t ON)<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> 2 x In I = 8 x In<br />
protection 3 x In t2 = 0.05 s (curve A)<br />
4 x In 0.10 s (curve B)<br />
6 x In 0.25 s (curve C)<br />
8 x In 0.5 s (curve D)<br />
10 x In<br />
I2 = 1 x In With current YES t = k (time-current curves I 2 t OFF)<br />
2 x In I > I2<br />
3 x In t2 = 0.05 s (curve A)<br />
4 x In 0.10 s (curve B)<br />
6 x In 0.25 s (curve C)<br />
8 x In 0.5 s (curve D)<br />
10 x In<br />
Instantaneous I3 = 1.5 x In Instantaneous YES t = k<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> 2 x In trip<br />
protection 4 x In<br />
6 x In<br />
8 x In<br />
10 x In<br />
12 x In<br />
Earth I4 = 0.2 x In With current I = 4 x I4 YES t = k/I 2<br />
fault 0.3 x In t4 = 0.1 s (curve A)<br />
protection 0.4 x In 0.2 s (curve B)<br />
0.6 x In 0.4 s (curve C)<br />
0.8 x In 0.8 s (curve D)<br />
0.9 x In<br />
1 x In<br />
55<br />
Mini0351
OSEM00106<br />
OSEM0107<br />
Trip curves of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 releases<br />
30’<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
30’<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
56<br />
20<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
0.4 0.6 0.7<br />
0.95<br />
0.9<br />
0.5 0.8 1<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
1.5 2 4 6 8 10 12<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.80.91 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25<br />
20<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
0.95<br />
2 3 4 6 8 10<br />
0.4<br />
0.5<br />
0.6 0.7 0.9<br />
0.8<br />
1<br />
1<br />
1.5 2 4 6 8 10 12<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
t = K<br />
I 2<br />
I 2 t<br />
ON<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.80.91 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
Trip threshold<br />
tolerances<br />
L = release between<br />
1.05 and 1.3 I1 (in<br />
conformity with IEC<br />
947-2 standards)<br />
S = ± 10%;<br />
I = ± 20%;<br />
Trip time<br />
tolerances<br />
L = ± 10% ( 20% per<br />
l>2 x ln);<br />
S = ± 20%;<br />
I = ± 20%;<br />
Caption<br />
ln= Rated current of<br />
current transformers<br />
t = trip time
OSEM00108<br />
OSEM0109<br />
30’<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
30’<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
20<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.80.91 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25<br />
20<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8<br />
0.4<br />
0.5<br />
0.6<br />
I<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
0.7<br />
t = K<br />
OFF<br />
0.8<br />
0.9<br />
0.9<br />
1<br />
1<br />
0.95<br />
1<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
2 3 4 6 8 10<br />
1.5 2 4 6 8 10 12<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.80.91 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A<br />
Trip threshold<br />
tolerances<br />
L = release between<br />
1.05 and 1.3 I1 (in<br />
conformity with IEC<br />
947-2 standards)<br />
S = ± 10%;<br />
I = ± 20%;<br />
G = ± 20%<br />
Trip time<br />
tolerances<br />
L = ± 10% ( 20% per<br />
l>2 x ln);<br />
S = ± 20%;<br />
I = ± 20%;<br />
G = ± 20%<br />
Caption<br />
ln= Rated current of<br />
current<br />
transformers<br />
t = trip time<br />
57
<strong>Emax</strong>0350<br />
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
microprocessor-based releases<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release is a sophisticated protection system<br />
using microprocessor technology. It comprises the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112/P protection unit and, on request, a dialogue unit. In<br />
this case it takes the code <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD.<br />
The wide range of settings makes this protection unit ideal for<br />
general use in any type of installation.<br />
58<br />
8 9 10 11 12 13<br />
14<br />
Caption<br />
Consulting information and programming is extremely easy using<br />
a keyboard and alphanumeric liquid crystal display.<br />
An ammeter function and many additional functions are provided<br />
over and above the protection functions. These additional<br />
functions can be increased still further with the addition<br />
of the dialogue and signalling unit.<br />
7 6 5<br />
4 3 2 1<br />
1 Programming keys (for selecting parameters)<br />
2 Liquid crystal display<br />
3 Rating plate indicating the rated current of the CT and neutral<br />
plus the release serial number<br />
4 Test pushbutton (TEST)<br />
5 Magnetic signalling devices showing protection functions<br />
L, S, I, G tripped<br />
6 Magnetic signalling device showing excessive release case<br />
temperature rise (second threshold)<br />
7 Key for resetting the magnetic signalling devices and protection<br />
device tripped signalling contact (RESET)<br />
8 Key-operated selector switch for choosing read only mode<br />
(READ) or setting mode (EDIT) for the parameters<br />
9 Microprocessor fault LED signalling device<br />
10 Auxiliary power supply LED signalling device<br />
11 LED signalling devices showing communication in progress<br />
between dialogue unit and control centre.<br />
Not available for <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/P<br />
12 Pre-alarm signalling device (dedicated message on display)<br />
13 Alarm signalling device (dedicated message on display)<br />
14 Connector for connecting to external units such as <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR110/B and <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T (additional functions).
GSEM0073<br />
Operation, protection functions and self-test<br />
t<br />
t = k<br />
t = k<br />
I 2<br />
Power supply<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release does not normally require any external<br />
power supplies, being self-powered from the current transformers<br />
(CT). For the protection and ammeter functions to operate,<br />
it is sufficient for at least one phase to have a current<br />
load equivalent to 35% of the rated current of the CTs (20% in<br />
cases where two phases are powered). The unit ensures full<br />
operation with self-powering, but by supplying an auxiliary<br />
power supply between 18 and 36 Vdc or between 18 and 25<br />
Vac, the unit can also be used with the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open or<br />
with the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker closed, but with a single-phase current<br />
load of less than 35% of the rated current of the CTs.<br />
It is also possible to use an auxiliary power supply provided<br />
by the PR110/B portable battery unit (always supplied) which<br />
allows the protection functions to be set when the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
is not self-powered.<br />
A wide range of setting options is available for the thresholds<br />
and trip times of all the functions.<br />
Functions S and G can operate with a time delay that is independent<br />
of the current (t = k) or with an inverse time delay<br />
(constant specific let-through energy: I 2 t = k), as required.<br />
Protection against earth faults can also be obtained by connecting<br />
the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 to an external toroid located on the<br />
conductor which connects the transformer star centre to earth<br />
(homopolar toroid).<br />
I<br />
GSEM0074<br />
t<br />
t = k<br />
t = k<br />
I 2<br />
All the thresholds and trip curve delays of the protection functions<br />
are stored in special memories which retain the information<br />
even if no power is supplied.<br />
Protection functions<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release offers the following protection functions:<br />
• overload (L)<br />
• selective short-<strong>circuit</strong> (S)<br />
• instantaneous short-<strong>circuit</strong> (I)<br />
• earth fault (G). (Residual or Source ground return) by means<br />
of a toroid installed on the earthing connection of the main<br />
power supply.<br />
• self-protection against excessive temperature rises.<br />
Neutral adjustment<br />
The neutral protection is 50% of the value set for the phase<br />
protection in the standard version. A version with the neutral<br />
protection set to 100% is available on request (for E1, E2 and<br />
E3 only).<br />
I<br />
59
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
microprocessor-based releases<br />
Notes:<br />
(1) 21 thresholds can be selected, i.e.: I2 = 0.6-0.8-1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4-4.5-5-5.5-6-6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-9.5-10 x In<br />
(2) 15 thresholds can be selected, i.e.: I3 = 1.5-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15 x In.<br />
60<br />
Protection functions and setting values of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release<br />
Function Limit Threshold Trip time Can be Relation Thermal Zone<br />
values steps adjustment (s) excluded t = f (I) memory selectivity<br />
Overload I1 = 0,01xIn (With current I = 3xI1) NO t = k/I 2 YES NO<br />
protection 0.4…1xIn t1 = 3-6-12-24-36-48-72- (can be<br />
108-144 excluded)<br />
Selective I2 = (1) t2 = 0-0.05-0.07-0.1-0.14- YES t = k NO YES (can be<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> 0.6…10 xIn 0.20-0.21-0.25-0.28- excluded)<br />
protection 0.30-0.35-0.40-0.50-<br />
0.60-0.70-0.75<br />
I2 = (1) (With current I=10xIn) YES t = k/I 2 YES NO<br />
0.6…10 xIn t2 = 0.05-0.07-0.1-0.14- (can be<br />
0.20-0.21-0.25-0.28- excluded)<br />
0.30-0.35-0.40-0.50-<br />
0.60-0.70-0.75<br />
Instantaneous I3 = (2) Instantaneous YES t = k NO NO<br />
short- 1.5…15 xIn trip<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
protection<br />
Earth I4 = 0.02xIn t4= 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6- YES t = k NO YES (can be<br />
fault 0.2…1xIn 0.7-0.8-0.9-1 excluded)<br />
protection<br />
I4 = 0.02xIn t4= 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6- YES t = k/I 2 NO NO<br />
0.2…1xIn 0.7-0.8-0.9-1<br />
Mini0350
<strong>Emax</strong>0350x<br />
Protection against excessive temperature<br />
The range of <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 releases allows the presence of<br />
abnormal temperatures which could cause temporary or continuous<br />
malfunctions of the microprocessor to be signalled to<br />
the user.<br />
The user has the following signals or commands available:<br />
– lighting up of the “Warning” LED when the temperature is<br />
higher than 70 °C (temperature at which the microprocessor<br />
is still able to operate correctly)<br />
– lighting up of the “Emergency” LED when the temperature<br />
is higher than 85 °C (temperature above which the microprocessor<br />
can no longer guarantee correct operation) and,<br />
when decided during the unit configuration stage, simultaneous<br />
opening of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker with change-over of<br />
the relative magnetic signal.<br />
Microprocessor self-diagnosis<br />
The range of <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 releases contains an electronic <strong>circuit</strong><br />
which checks operation of the microprocessor of the protection<br />
unit in real time (an additional electronic <strong>circuit</strong> is provided<br />
for the PR112/PD unit for checking the microprocessor<br />
of the dialogue unit).<br />
In case of a temporary or continuous malfunction, the following<br />
two signals are activated:<br />
– lighting up of the “μP Fault” LED (when the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD<br />
unit is present, the “μP Communication Fault” LED also lights<br />
up)<br />
– when there is auxiliary power supply, closure of the “μP Fault”<br />
contact.<br />
Test functions<br />
Following enabling on the “control” menu, the “TEST”<br />
pushbutton on the front of the release (detail 4) allows correct<br />
operation of the chain consisting of the microprocessor, opening<br />
solenoid and <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to be checked.<br />
Within the control menu there is also the possibility of testing<br />
correct operation of the display, signalling LEDs, magnetic signals<br />
and electrical contacts supplied in all the versions of the<br />
PR112 release.<br />
By means of the front multi-pin connector (detail 14), it is possible<br />
to apply a Test unit called <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T which allows<br />
the functions of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 releases to be<br />
tested and checked.<br />
4 14<br />
61
GSEM00110<br />
GSEM0111<br />
Trip curves of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release<br />
30’<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
30’<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
62<br />
20<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
0.4<br />
0.6<br />
1<br />
1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10<br />
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 15<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.80.91 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20<br />
20<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
0.4<br />
t = k<br />
0.5<br />
1<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0,7 0.7 0,80,91 0.80.91 1.2 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20<br />
1.5<br />
1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10<br />
1.5<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
10<br />
12<br />
15<br />
Trip threshold<br />
tolerances<br />
L = release between<br />
1.05 and 1.3 I1 (in<br />
conformity with<br />
IEC 947-2<br />
standards)<br />
S = ± 10%;<br />
I = ± 15%;<br />
t=k/I 2<br />
Trip time<br />
tolerances<br />
L = ± 10% (± 20% for<br />
l>2 x ln);<br />
S = ± 20%;<br />
I = ± 20%;<br />
Caption<br />
ln= Rated current of<br />
current<br />
transformers.<br />
t = trip time.
GSEM00112<br />
30’<br />
20’<br />
10 3<br />
10’<br />
5’<br />
2’<br />
1’<br />
20<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
10 2<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
10<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0.06<br />
0.04<br />
0.02<br />
t = k<br />
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7<br />
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1<br />
1<br />
0.01<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.80.91 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20<br />
t=k/I 2<br />
Trip threshold<br />
tolerances<br />
G = ± 15%;<br />
Trip time<br />
tolerances<br />
G = ± 20%;<br />
Caption<br />
ln= Rated current of<br />
current<br />
transformers.<br />
t = trip time.<br />
63
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
microprocessor-based releases<br />
Communication<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release with dialogue unit (PR112/PD) is able<br />
to communicate with a monitoring and control system using<br />
two different communication protocols: ABB Insum and LON.<br />
Reception and transmission of information<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD release is able to receive the opening<br />
and closing commands from the system and to actuate them<br />
using the opening and closing releases. Furthermore, it also<br />
receives and stores the unit configuration and programming<br />
parameters:<br />
– the protection function current thresholds;<br />
– the protection function curves;<br />
– the unit configuration parameters.<br />
Note:<br />
While the communication parameters are necessary for remote operation,<br />
they can only be programmed locally.<br />
All the information can be consulted both locally and using the<br />
supervision system.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release fitted with dialogue unit is able to<br />
transmit the following information on the state of the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
remotely:<br />
• protection parameters set<br />
• setting of the neutral protection (50% or 100%)<br />
• configuration setting<br />
• current values on the three phases, on the neutral and on<br />
the PE conductor<br />
• state of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker (open/closed)<br />
• <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker condition connected/test/withdrawn<br />
• state of the operating mechanism springs (charged/discharged)<br />
• contact wear<br />
• number of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker mechanical operations<br />
• last interrupted current<br />
• state of protection functions<br />
• size of current transformers<br />
• “READ/EDIT” key position and request for local control.<br />
Event marking and storage function (with LON<br />
interface only)<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD release keeps its time base synchronised<br />
with the absolute system time. Thanks to the availability of the<br />
absolute time, it is possible to time mark the events that occur<br />
in the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker and in the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release itself. By<br />
collecting any such events which occur in the various devices<br />
64<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0368a<br />
installed in the system, the supervision and control system can<br />
process a list of events that is important for control and analysis<br />
of the installation. Such an analysis can, for example, be particularly<br />
useful for tracing the causes of a fault.<br />
Events detected and time-marked:<br />
– all protection events;<br />
– all “WARNING” and “ALARM” signals;<br />
– all “READ” / “EDIT” change-overs;<br />
– all opening and closing operations.<br />
The above information is stored locally (PR112/PD) and made<br />
available to the supervision and control system.<br />
Note:<br />
The function described is available when the LON communication protocol<br />
is being used. When the ABB Insum protocol is being used, it is only<br />
possible to send the above information to the central supervision and<br />
control system.<br />
Function for storing state information<br />
When an auxiliary power supply is provided, the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
release is able to store the following information in a volatile<br />
memory, making it available for consultation:<br />
– information/data subsequent to last protection trip (currents<br />
interrupted, type of fault, etc.);<br />
– number of operations performed by the unit;<br />
– contact wear;<br />
– excessive temperature rise causing the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to<br />
open.<br />
This information can be read locally or sent by remote transfer.
<strong>Emax</strong>0350<br />
User interface<br />
Four pushbuttons and an enabling key with two positions<br />
(“READ” and “EDIT”) are used to consult the information available<br />
and the parameters set in the memory of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
(“READ” mode) or to program and configure the unit (“EDIT”<br />
mode) - all the choices are made using step-by-step menus.<br />
Indication LEDs<br />
Two LEDs on the front panel of the release are used to indicate<br />
pre-alarms (“WARNING”) and alarms (“ALARM”). A message<br />
on the display always explicitly indicates the type of event<br />
concerned.<br />
Events indicated by the “WARNING” LED:<br />
– unbalance between phases;<br />
– pre-alarm for overload (I >90%);<br />
1<br />
– first temperature threshold exceeded (70 °C);<br />
– distorted waveform;<br />
– zone selectivity enabled and no Vaux;<br />
– contact wear exceeds 80%.<br />
Events indicated by “EMERGENCY” LED:<br />
– overload (I>105% I ), function L under timing;<br />
1<br />
– function S under timing;<br />
– function G under timing;<br />
– second temperature threshold exceeded (85 °C);<br />
– contact wear 100%.<br />
7<br />
9 10 11<br />
A further four LEDs (9, 10, 11) signal the following:<br />
–“μP Fault”: indicates that the protection unit microprocessor<br />
has a temporary (lit for a limited time) or permanent (lit for an<br />
unlimited time) fault<br />
– “Vaux”: indicates there is an auxiliary power supply<br />
– “Communication NETWORK”: indicates the communication<br />
activity between the dialogue unit and the remote supervision<br />
unit<br />
– “Communication μP Fault”: indicates that the communication<br />
unit microprocessor has a temporary (lit for a limited<br />
time) or permanent (lit for an unlimited time) fault<br />
Electrical signalling contacts<br />
Three clean contacts provided on all versions of the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112 release enable electrical signalling of the following:<br />
– (5 A / 240 V ac) overload alarm (I >90%);<br />
1<br />
– (0.5 A / 125 V ac) relay tripped (closes following tripping of<br />
any of the protection functions - L, S, I, G and excessive<br />
temperature rise);<br />
– microprocessor fault (can be used to directly close the <strong>circuit</strong><br />
which powers the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker shunt opening release).<br />
Note:<br />
The overload and microprocessor fault contacts to the microcontroller are<br />
available with an external auxiliary power supply.<br />
65
Overcurrent protection with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
microprocessor-based releases<br />
Resetting trip signals<br />
The “RESET” pushbutton (detail 7 on page 65) allows local<br />
resetting of the protection trip signals (relay tripped contact<br />
and magnetic flags).<br />
In the case of remote control, the resetting signal for the protection<br />
trip signals can be transmitted by means of a dialogue<br />
unit (PR112/PD version) only for relay trip caused by excessive<br />
temperature and by overload (L). Resetting the trip signals<br />
for the other functions (S, I and G) can only be carried out<br />
locally. When the signal is not reset, actuation of the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
closing command by the dialogue unit is prevented.<br />
Load control<br />
According to the relative trip threshold setting for overload (I1),<br />
the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 unit allows two trip thresholds to be defined<br />
(fraction of I1) which, by using the <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K signalling<br />
unit, can enable two clean contacts with electrical characteristics<br />
which allow one shunt closing or opening release of the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to be piloted for any power supply <strong>voltage</strong> value.<br />
These contacts make various applications possible, among<br />
which load control, alarms, signals and electrical interlocks.<br />
Within the sphere of load control, there are two possible configurations<br />
which can be selected by the user during the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112 parametrisation stage:<br />
– disconnection of two loads<br />
– connection and disconnection of a load<br />
Measuring function<br />
The current measuring function (ammeter) is present on all<br />
versions of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 unit.<br />
The display shows the currents of the three phases, of the neutral<br />
and of the earth fault.<br />
The latter current value takes on two different meanings depending<br />
on whether the external toroidal transformer for the<br />
“Source Ground Return” function or the internal transformer<br />
(residual type) is connected.<br />
The ammeter can operate either with self-supply or with auxiliary<br />
power supply <strong>voltage</strong>.<br />
Accuracy of the ammeter measuring chain (current transformer<br />
66<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0375<br />
plus ammeter) in the 30% - 120% current range of In comes<br />
under class 5.<br />
Versions available<br />
• PR112/P (LSI)<br />
• PR112/P (LSIG)<br />
• PR112/PD (LSI)<br />
• PR112/PD (LSIG)<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR110/B power supply accessory<br />
This accessory – always supplied with the range of <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112 releases – makes it possible to read and configure the<br />
parameters of the unit whatever the state of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
(open-closed, in the test or connected position, with/without<br />
auxiliary power supply).<br />
Inside it there is an electronic <strong>circuit</strong> which allows power supply<br />
to the unit for about 3 h continuously to carry out just the<br />
readout and data configuration operations.<br />
Autonomy decreases proportionally to use if the PR110/B accessory<br />
is also used to carry out the “COMMAND” menu functions<br />
(Trip test, Auto test, CB closing (*), CB opening (*)).<br />
(*) only with <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD version
<strong>Emax</strong>0376<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K signalling unit<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K signalling unit is able to convert the digital<br />
signals supplied by the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 unit (both in the P and<br />
PD version, with LSI or LSIG protection functions) into electrical<br />
signals by means of normally open electrical contacts.<br />
An auxiliary power supply with a <strong>voltage</strong> stabilised at 24V d.c.<br />
(±20% with maximum ripple ±5%) and insulated from earth is<br />
required to operate the unit.<br />
It is connected to the Internal Bus of the protection unit by<br />
means of a dedicated serial line accessible to the user, along<br />
which all the information regarding the state of activation of<br />
the protection functions is transmitted on the basis of which<br />
the relative power contacts are closed.<br />
The following are available in particular:<br />
– contact for signalling overload alarm (circulating current<br />
higher than 130% of I1)<br />
– contact for signalling protection L tripped<br />
– contact for signalling protection S tripped<br />
– contact for signalling protection I tripped<br />
– contact for signalling protection G tripped<br />
– contact for signalling second threshold for temperature too<br />
high exceeded (T>85°C)<br />
– load control.<br />
In particular, the contact for signalling that the second threshold<br />
for temperature too high has been exceeded can be<br />
configured by means of a dip switch on the unit, allowing signalling<br />
no connection with the Internal Bus as an alternative.<br />
Two contacts available on the <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K unit (load control)<br />
allow a <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker shunt opening or closing release to<br />
be piloted whatever the power supply <strong>voltage</strong> of the release.<br />
These contacts make various applications possible, among<br />
which load control, alarms, signals and electrical interlocks.<br />
The alarm signal remains active for the whole duration of the<br />
overload until eventual trip of the release.<br />
The signals for protection trips remain active during the timing<br />
phase and stay like this even after the release trip.<br />
A Reset pushbutton allows the state of all the signals to be<br />
reset.<br />
There are also two LEDs available on the unit for visual signalling<br />
of the following information:<br />
– “power ON”: auxiliary power supply present<br />
– “TX (Int BUS)”: flashing synchronised with communication<br />
activity with the Internal Bus<br />
The table below shows the characteristics of the signalling<br />
relays available on the <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/K unit.<br />
Characteristics of the signalling relays<br />
Auxiliary power supply 24 V c.c. ± 20%<br />
Maximum ripple 5%<br />
Maximum interrupted current 5 A<br />
Maximum interrupted <strong>voltage</strong> 250 V c.a. / 130 V c.c.<br />
Resistive load breaking -<br />
capacity 50 W / 800 VA (48 V c.c. / 220 V c.a.)<br />
Inductive load breaking<br />
capacity 25 W / 500 VA (48 V c.c./ 220 V c.a.)<br />
Contact/contact insulation 1000 V eff<br />
Contact/coil insulation 2000 V eff<br />
67
<strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T<br />
Test and Configuration Unit<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T unit is an instrument able to carry out the<br />
Test, programming and parameter readout functions for the<br />
protection units which are fitted with <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> low <strong>voltage</strong><br />
<strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
In particular, the Test function regards the following units:<br />
– <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 (in all versions)<br />
– <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 (in all versions)<br />
whereas the programming and parameter readout functions<br />
regard the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 range of releases.<br />
All the functions mentioned can be carried out ON BOARD by<br />
connecting the <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T unit to the front multi-pin connector<br />
on the various protection units. Connection is ensured<br />
by special interfacing cables supplied as standard with the<br />
unit.<br />
The man-machine interface is ensured by the use of a membrane<br />
keyboard and a multi-line alphanumerical display.<br />
There are also two LEDs on the unit which signal the following<br />
respectively:<br />
– POWER-ON and STAND BY situation<br />
– state of battery charge<br />
Two different types of Test are provided: automatic (only for<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR112) and manual.<br />
By means of connection to a PC (with diskette supplied by<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.), it is also possible to up-grade the <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/<br />
T unit software to adapt the Test unit as new products evolve.<br />
It is also possible to memorise the most important results of<br />
the test in the unit itself and to send them to the Personal Computer<br />
on a specific request for “issue of report”.<br />
In automatic mode (operation allowed with the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112<br />
range), the <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T unit can test the following:<br />
– L, S, I protection functions;<br />
– G protection function with internal transformer;<br />
– G protection function with the toroid placed on the star centre<br />
of the transformer;<br />
– monitoring of correct microprocessor operation;<br />
– load control function for L function.<br />
The same tests can be repeated manually for both the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR111 and <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 ranges of releases.<br />
68<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0378<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T unit is portable, operates with rechargeable<br />
batteries and/or with an external feeder (always provided)<br />
with 100-240 Vac / 12 Vdc rated <strong>voltage</strong><br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T unit includes the following in the standard<br />
supply:<br />
– <strong>SACE</strong> PR010/T Test unit complete with rechargeable batteries<br />
– <strong>SACE</strong> TT1 Test unit<br />
– external 100 - 240 Vac/12 Vdc feeder<br />
– connection cables between the unit and the multi-pin connector<br />
on the range of releases which equip the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
series<br />
– connection cable between the unit and the PC (RS232 serial)<br />
– power supply cable<br />
– instruction manual and diskette with application software<br />
– plastic container.
CONTENTS<br />
Accessories<br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories 70<br />
Spare parts and retrofitting 84<br />
69
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
The table below shows some functions which can be obtained<br />
by making a suitable selection of the accessories provided.<br />
Several of the functions listed may be needed at the same<br />
Remote control • Shunt opening release<br />
70<br />
Function<br />
time depending on the use made of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
See the related section for a detailed description of the individual<br />
accessories.<br />
• Shunt closing release<br />
• Geared motor for automatic charging of closing springs<br />
Remote signalling or actuation of automatic functions • Auxiliary contacts of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open / closed<br />
depending on the state (open / closed) or isolated,<br />
or on the position (connected / isolated) of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker • Auxiliary contacts of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker connected, isolated<br />
for test (for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> only)<br />
• Contact for electrical signalling of overcurrent releases<br />
tripped<br />
• Contact for signalling under<strong>voltage</strong> de-energised<br />
• Contact for signalling springs charged<br />
Remote opening for various needs, including: • Shunt opening or under<strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
– manual emergency operation<br />
– opening interlocked with operation of other switchgear or<br />
with plant automation requirements.<br />
Examples<br />
– <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> on L.V. side of transformers in parallel<br />
that must open automatically when the M.V. side device<br />
opens<br />
– automatic opening controlled by external relay<br />
(under<strong>voltage</strong>, residual-current, etc.)<br />
Automatic opening of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker due to under<strong>voltage</strong> • Instantaneous or time delay <strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
(as in the case, for example, of operation of asynchronous N.B. The time-delay device is recommended when<br />
motors) unwarranted operation due to temporary <strong>voltage</strong> drops,<br />
is to be avoided (for functional or safety reasons).<br />
• Contact for signalling under<strong>voltage</strong> energised<br />
Increase in degree of protection • IP54 protective cover for door<br />
Components<br />
Mechanical safety locks for maintenance or functional • Key lock in open position<br />
requirements for interlocking two or more <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
• Padlock device in open position<br />
• Key lock and padlock device in connected, isolated for test,<br />
isolated position<br />
Automatic switching of power supplies • Mechanical interlock between two or three <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>
<strong>Emax</strong>0332<br />
Accessories supplied as standard<br />
The following standard accessories are supplied depending on the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker version:<br />
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>:<br />
– flange for switchboard compartment door (IP30)<br />
– support for service releases<br />
– four auxiliary contacts for electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
open/closed (for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> only)<br />
– terminal box for connecting outgoing auxiliaries<br />
– horizontal rear terminals<br />
– lifting plate<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0333<br />
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>:<br />
– flange for switchboard compartment door<br />
– support for service releases<br />
– four auxiliary contacts for electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
open/closed (for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> only)<br />
– sliding contacts for connecting outgoing auxiliaries<br />
– horizontal rear terminals<br />
– anti-insertion lock for <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with different rated<br />
currents<br />
– racking-out crank handle<br />
– lifting plate<br />
71
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
CAPTION:<br />
72<br />
= Accessory on request<br />
on fixed or on moving<br />
part<br />
= accessory on request<br />
for fixed part<br />
= accessory on request<br />
for moving part<br />
(*) For automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
four auxiliary contacts for electrical<br />
signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
open/closed is included<br />
in the supply as standard.<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0295<br />
E1 … E6<br />
Accessories Circuit-breaker<br />
Circuit-breaker version Fixed Withdrawable<br />
1a) Shunt opening/closing release (YO/YC)<br />
1b) SOR Test Unit<br />
Compatibility table for accessories and different versions<br />
2a) Under<strong>voltage</strong> rerlease (YU)<br />
2b) Time-delay device for under<strong>voltage</strong> release (D)<br />
3) Geared motor for automatic charging of closing<br />
springs (M)<br />
4a) Mechanical signalling of overcurrent<br />
releases tripped<br />
4b) Electrical and mechanical signalling<br />
of overcurrent releases tripped<br />
5a) Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open/closed ( * )<br />
5b) Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker connected/<br />
isolated for test/isolated<br />
5c) Contact signalling closing springs charged<br />
5d) Contact signalling under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release energised (C.aux YU)<br />
6a) Current transformer for neutral conductor<br />
outside <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
6b) Homopolar toroid for main power supply<br />
earthing conductor<br />
7) Mechanical operation counter<br />
8a) Lock in open position<br />
8b) Circuit-breaker lock in connected/isolated/<br />
isolated for test position<br />
8c) Accessories for lock in isolated/<br />
isolated for test position<br />
8d) Accessories for shutter padlock device<br />
8e) Mechanical lock for compartment door<br />
9a) Protection for opening and closing pushbuttons<br />
9b) IP54 door protection<br />
10) Circuit-breaker interlock
<strong>Emax</strong>0296<br />
E1 … E6 E1 … E6 E1 … E6 E1 … E6<br />
Switch-disconnector Isolating truck Earthing switch with Earthing truck<br />
(MS) (CS) making capacity (MTP) (MT)<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0328<br />
Fixed Withdrawable Withdrawable Withdrawable Withdrawable<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0329<br />
(YC)<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0330<br />
73
<strong>Emax</strong>0369<br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
Electrical accessories<br />
1a) Shunt opening/closing release (YO/YC)<br />
Allows remote control opening or closing of the switchgear<br />
depending on the installation position and connection of the<br />
releases in the support. The release can be used for either of<br />
these uses. Given the characteristics of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
operating mechanism, opening (with the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker closed)<br />
is always possible, while closing is only possible when the<br />
closing springs are charged. The release can operate with direct<br />
current or alternating current.<br />
This release provides instantaneous operation (*), but can be<br />
powered permanently (**).<br />
When used as a permanently powered closing release, it is<br />
necessary to momentarily de-energise the closing release in<br />
order to close the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker again after opening (in fact,<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker operating mechanism has an anti-pumping<br />
device).<br />
(*) The minimum impulse current duration time in instantaneous<br />
service must be 100 ms.<br />
(**) If the opening release is permanently connected to the power<br />
supply, wait at least 30 ms before sending the command to the<br />
shunt closing release.<br />
74<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0374<br />
Power supply (Un): 24 V –<br />
30 V ∼<br />
48 V ∼<br />
60 V ∼<br />
110-120 V ∼<br />
120-127 V ∼<br />
220-240 V ∼<br />
240-250 V ∼<br />
380-400 V ∼<br />
440-480 V ∼<br />
Operating limits: (YO): 70 … 110 Un<br />
(CEI EN 60947-2 Standards)<br />
(YC): 85 … 110 Un<br />
Inrush power (Ps): DC = 200 W<br />
Inrush time ~100 ms AC = 200 VA<br />
Continuous power (Pc): DC = 5 W<br />
AC = 5 VA<br />
Opening time (YO): (max) 60 ms<br />
Closing time (YC): (max) 80 ms<br />
Insulation <strong>voltage</strong>: 2500 V 50 Hz (for 1 min)<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams:<br />
YO (4-5) - YC (2-3)<br />
1b) SOR Test Unit<br />
The control/monitoring SOR Test Unit allows continuity of the<br />
different versions of <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series of shunt opening releases<br />
to be checked.<br />
Under particularly severe operating conditions or simply for<br />
remote control of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, the shunt opening release<br />
as an accessory for the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series of <strong>air</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
is widely used.
Maintenance of all functions of this accessory is a necessary<br />
condition to guarantee a high level of safety in the installation.<br />
This bring about the need to have a device available which<br />
cyclically checks correct operation of the release, signalling<br />
any malfunctions.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> SOR Test Unit allows continuity of the shunt opening<br />
release with a rated operating <strong>voltage</strong> between 24 V and<br />
250 V (a.c. and d.c.) to be checked.<br />
Checking of continuity is carried out cyclically with an interval<br />
of 20s between one test and the next.<br />
The unit has visual signals by means of LEDs. The following<br />
information in particular is indicated:<br />
• POWER ON: power supply present<br />
• YO TESTING: version of the test<br />
• TEST FAILED: signal following a failed test or lack of auxiliary<br />
power supply<br />
• ALARM: signal following three failed tests.<br />
Two relays with one change-over are also available on board<br />
the unit which allow remote signalling of the following two<br />
events:<br />
• failure of a test - resetting takes place automatically when<br />
the alarm stops<br />
• failure of three tests - resetting only takes place by means of<br />
the manual RESET from the front of the unit.<br />
There is also a button for manual RESET on the front of the<br />
unit.<br />
The main characteristics of the <strong>SACE</strong> SOR Test Unit are indicated<br />
below.<br />
Auxiliary power supply 24 V ... 250 V ~<br />
Maximum interrupted current 6 A<br />
Maximum interrupted <strong>voltage</strong> 250V AC<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0370<br />
2a) Under<strong>voltage</strong> release (YU)<br />
The under<strong>voltage</strong> release opens the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker in the event<br />
of a significant drop in the power supply <strong>voltage</strong> or a power<br />
supply failure. It can be used for remote release (using normally-closed<br />
pushbuttons), for a lock on closing or for monitoring<br />
the <strong>voltage</strong> in the primary and secondary <strong>circuit</strong>s. The<br />
power supply for the release is therefore branched on the<br />
supply side of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker or from an independent<br />
source. The <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker can only be closed with the release<br />
powered (the closing lock is obtained mechanically).<br />
The release can operate both with direct current and alternating<br />
current.<br />
Power supply (Un):<br />
24 V – 120-127 V ~<br />
30 V ~ 220-240 V ~<br />
48 V ~ 240-250 V ~<br />
60 V ~ 380-400 V ~<br />
110-120 V ~ 440-480 V ~<br />
Operating limits: (CEI EN 60947-2 Standards)<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is opened with release power supply<br />
<strong>voltage</strong>s equal to 35-70% Un.<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker can be closed with a release power supply<br />
<strong>voltage</strong> equal to 85-110% Un.<br />
Inrush power (Ps): DC = 200 W<br />
AC = 200 VA<br />
Continuous power (Pc) DC = 5 W<br />
AC = 5 VA<br />
Opening time (YU): 30 ms<br />
Insulation <strong>voltage</strong>: 2500 V 50 Hz (for 1 min)<br />
It can be fitted with a contact for signalling the under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release is energised (C.aux YU) (see accessory 5d)<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: YU (6)<br />
75
<strong>Emax</strong>0381<br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
2b) Time-delay device for under<strong>voltage</strong> release (D)<br />
The under<strong>voltage</strong> release can be combined with an electronic<br />
time-delay device for installation outside the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker,<br />
allowing delayed trip of the release with adjustable preset times.<br />
Use of the delayed under<strong>voltage</strong> release is recommended to<br />
prevent tripping when the power supply network for the release<br />
may be subject to brief <strong>voltage</strong> drops or power supply<br />
failures. Closing of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is inhibited when it is not<br />
powered.<br />
The time-delay device is designed to operate in conjunction<br />
with the under<strong>voltage</strong> release with the same <strong>voltage</strong> as the<br />
time-delay device.<br />
The characteristics of the time-delay device are as follows:<br />
Power supply (D): 24-30 V<br />
48 V<br />
60 V<br />
110-115 V<br />
220-250 V<br />
Adjustable opening<br />
time (YU+D): 0.5-1-1.5-2-3 s<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: YU+D (7)<br />
76<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0382<br />
3) Geared motor for automatic charging of closing<br />
springs (M)<br />
Allows automatic charging of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker operating<br />
mechanism closing springs. The geared motor charges the<br />
closing springs again immediately after the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker has<br />
closed.<br />
The closing springs can, however, be charged manually (using<br />
the relative operating mechanism lever) in the event of a<br />
power supply failure or during maintenance work.<br />
Power supply 24-30 V<br />
48-60 V<br />
100-130 V<br />
220-250 V<br />
Operating limits: 85…110 Un<br />
(CEI EN 60947-2 Standards)<br />
Inrush power (Ps): DC = 500 W<br />
AC = 500 VA<br />
Rated power (Pn): DC = 200 W<br />
AC = 200 VA<br />
Inrush time 0.2 s<br />
Loading time: 4-5 s<br />
Insulation <strong>voltage</strong>: 2500 V 50 Hz (for 1 min)<br />
It is always supplied with a limit contact and microswitch for<br />
signalling that the closing springs are charged (see accessory<br />
5d).<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: M (1)
<strong>Emax</strong>0414<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0387<br />
4) Mechanical and electrical signalling of<br />
under<strong>voltage</strong> releases tripped<br />
The following signals are available after the overcurrent release<br />
has tripped:<br />
4a) Mechanical signalling of overcurrent releases<br />
tripped<br />
Where the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is open following operation of the<br />
overcurrent releases, this can be signalled visually on the operating<br />
mechanism, moving the release tripped pushbutton<br />
out. The <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker can only be closed again by resetting<br />
the pushbutton to its normal position.<br />
4b) Electrical and mechanical signalling of overcurrent<br />
releases tripped<br />
Allows visual signalling on the operating mechanism (mechanical)<br />
and remote signalling (electrical using change-over contact)<br />
that the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is open following operation of the<br />
overcurrent releases. The mechanical signalling pushbutton<br />
must be rearmed to reset the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release is already supplied with an internal<br />
overcurrent signalling contact.<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: S51 (12)<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0384<br />
5) Auxiliary contacts<br />
Auxiliary contacts, installed on the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker are available,<br />
which enable the state of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to be signalled.<br />
Un In max T<br />
125 Vcc 0.3 A 10 ms<br />
250 Vcc 0.15 A<br />
Un In max cos ϕ<br />
ϕ<br />
250 Vca 5 A 0.3<br />
The auxiliary contacts are also available in a special version<br />
for application with rated <strong>voltage</strong>s Un < 24 V (digital signals).<br />
The versions available are as follows:<br />
5a) Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open/closed<br />
It is possible to have electrical signalling of the state (open/<br />
closed) of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker using 4, 10 or 15 auxiliary contacts.<br />
The auxiliary contacts have the following configurations:<br />
– 10 open/closed contacts (5 normally open + 5 normally<br />
closed); not available when the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 overcurrent<br />
release is required.<br />
– 15 additional open/closed contacts for installation outside<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker. The basic configuration described above<br />
may be modified by the user for normally open or normally<br />
closed indication by repositioning the faston connector on<br />
the microswitch.<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: Q/1÷10 (21-22)<br />
77
<strong>Emax</strong>0380<br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
5b) Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
connected / isolated for test / isolated<br />
In addition to mechanical signalling of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker position,<br />
it is also possible to obtain electrical signalling using 5<br />
or 10 auxiliary contacts which are installed on the fixed part.<br />
Only available for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> - for installation<br />
on the fixed part.<br />
The auxiliary contacts take on the following configurations:<br />
– 5 contacts; set comprising 2 contacts for signalling connected,<br />
2 contacts for signalling withdrawn and 1 contact<br />
for signalling test position (main pliers isolated, but sliding<br />
contacts inserted).<br />
– 10 contacts; set comprising 4 contacts for signalling connected,<br />
4 contacts for signalling withdrawn and 2 contacts<br />
for signalling test position (main pliers isolated, but sliding<br />
contacts inserted).<br />
Reference figure in diagrams:<br />
S75I (31-32)<br />
S75T (31-32)<br />
S75E (31-32)<br />
78<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0388 <strong>Emax</strong>0389<br />
5c) Contact for signalling closing springs loaded<br />
Comprises a microswitch which allows remote indication of<br />
the state of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker operating mechanism closing<br />
springs. (Supplied as standard with spring-charging geared<br />
motor).<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams S33 M/2 (11)<br />
5d) Contact signalling under<strong>voltage</strong> release energised<br />
(C.aux YU)<br />
The under<strong>voltage</strong> releases can be fitted with a contact (normally<br />
closed or open as preferred) for signalling under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
energised to provide remote signalling of the state of the under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release.<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: (12)
<strong>Emax</strong>0386<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0377<br />
6a) Current transformer for the neutral conductor<br />
outside the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Only for three-pole <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>. Allows protection of the<br />
neutral by means of connection to the overcurrent release. (Can<br />
be supplied on request).<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams:TI/N-UI/N (51-52)<br />
6b) Homopolar toroid for the main power supply<br />
earthing conductor (star centre of the<br />
transformer)<br />
The range of <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 microprocessor-based electronic<br />
releases can be used combined with an external toroid located<br />
on the conductor which connects the start centre of the MV/LV<br />
transformer to earth (homopolar transformer).<br />
In this case, the protection to earth is defined as Source Ground<br />
Return.<br />
The homopolar transformer is proposed in four different versions<br />
in terms of rated current (but keeping the same overall<br />
dimensions in any case).<br />
Rated current 100 A, 250 A, 400 A, 800 A<br />
Reference figure in <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams: TI/O (51-52)<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0406<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0416<br />
Mechanical accessories<br />
7) Mechanical operation counter<br />
Connected to the operating mechanism using a simple lever<br />
mechanism, it indicates the number of mechanical operations<br />
of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker. The indication is visible from outside on<br />
the front of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
8) Mechanical locks<br />
8a) Lock in open position<br />
Several different mechanisms are available which allow the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to be locked in the open position.<br />
These devices can be controlled by:<br />
– Key: a special circular lock with different keys (for a single<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker) or the same keys (for several <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>).<br />
In the latter case, up to four different key numbers are<br />
available.<br />
– Padlocks: up to 3 padlocks (not supplied): Ø 4 mm.<br />
79
<strong>Emax</strong>0372<br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
isolated<br />
This device can be controlled by a special circular lock with<br />
different keys (for a single <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker) or the same keys<br />
(for several <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> - up to four different key numbers<br />
available) and padlocks (up to 3 padlocks, not supplied - Ø 4<br />
mm).<br />
Only available for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> - for installation<br />
on the moving part.<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0415 8b) Circuit-breaker lock in connected / isolated for test /<br />
8c) Accessories for locking in isolated / isolated for test<br />
position<br />
In addition to the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker lock in the connected / isolated<br />
for test position - isolated, allows the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker to<br />
be locked only in the isolated or isolated for test positions.<br />
Only available for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> - for installation<br />
on the moving part.<br />
80<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0383 <strong>Emax</strong>0373<br />
8d) Accessory for shutter padlock device<br />
Allow the shutters (installed on the fixed part) to be padlocked<br />
in their closed position.<br />
Only available for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> - for installation<br />
on the fixed part.<br />
8e) Mechanical lock for compartment door<br />
Stops the compartment door from being opened when the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
is closed (and <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker connected for withdrawable<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>) and locks closing of the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
when the compartment door is open.
<strong>Emax</strong>0416<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0407<br />
9) Transparent protections<br />
9a) Opening and closing pushbutton protection<br />
These protections are fitted over the opening and closing<br />
pushbuttons, preventing the relative <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker operations<br />
unless a special tool is used.<br />
9b) IP54 door protection<br />
This is a transparent plastic protective cover which completely<br />
protects the front panel of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, and allows degree<br />
of protection IP54 to be achieved. Mounted on hinges, it<br />
is fitted with a key lock.<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0371<br />
10) Interlock between <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
This mechanism creates a mechanical interlock between two<br />
or three <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (even different models and different<br />
versions - fixed / withdrawable) using a flexible cable. The <strong>circuit</strong><br />
diagram for electrical switching using a relay (for installation<br />
by the customer) is supplied with the mechanical interlock.<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> can be installed vertically or horizontally.<br />
Four types of interlocks are available:<br />
type A: between 2 <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (power supply + emergency<br />
power supply)<br />
type B: between 3 <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (2 power supplies + emergency<br />
power supply)<br />
type C: between 3 <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (2 power supplies + bustie)<br />
type D: between 3 <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (3 power supplies / one single<br />
closed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker)<br />
N.B.: See the chapter on “Installation of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker” for<br />
information on the dimensions (fixed and withdrawable versions)<br />
and preparation (pages 107, 112 and 113).<br />
81
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
Interlocks<br />
The mechanical interlocks possible are shown below linked to<br />
whether 2 or 3 <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (any model in any version) are<br />
Between two <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
One normal power supply and<br />
one emergency power supply<br />
Type A<br />
Between three <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
Two normal power supplies and<br />
one emergency power supply<br />
Type B<br />
Between three <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
The two half-busbars can be powered<br />
by a single transformer (bus-tie closed)<br />
or by both at the same time (bus-tie<br />
open)<br />
Type C<br />
Between three <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
Three power supplies (generators or<br />
transformers) on the same busbar, so<br />
operation in parallel is not allowed<br />
Type D<br />
82<br />
1 2<br />
G<br />
1 2 3<br />
1 2 3<br />
1 2 3<br />
used in the switching system (also see chapter on “Accessories”).<br />
Type of interlock Typical <strong>circuit</strong> Interlocks possible<br />
G<br />
O = Circuit-breaker open<br />
I = Circuit-breaker closed<br />
O = Circuit-breaker open<br />
I = Circuit-breaker closed<br />
O = Circuit-breaker open<br />
I = Circuit-breaker closed<br />
G<br />
O = Circuit-breaker open<br />
I = Circuit-breaker closed<br />
Circuit-breaker 1 can only<br />
be closed if 2 is open and<br />
vice versa<br />
Circuit-<strong>breakers</strong> 1 and 3<br />
can only be closed if 2 is<br />
open.<br />
Circuit-breaker 2 can only<br />
be closed when 1 and 3<br />
are open.<br />
One or two <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
out of three can be<br />
closed at the same time.<br />
Only one of three <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
can be closed.<br />
1 2<br />
O O<br />
I O<br />
O I<br />
1 2 3<br />
O O O<br />
I O O<br />
O O I<br />
I O I<br />
O I O<br />
1 2 3<br />
O O O<br />
I O O<br />
O I O<br />
O O I<br />
O I I<br />
I I O<br />
I O I<br />
1 2 3<br />
O O O<br />
I O O<br />
O I O<br />
O O I
ASEM0057<br />
The emergency power supply is usually<br />
installed to take over from the normal<br />
power supply in two cases:<br />
– to power health and safety services<br />
(e.g. hospital installations);<br />
– to power parts of installations which<br />
are essential for requirements other<br />
than safety (e.g. continuous cycle industrial<br />
plants).<br />
The range of accessories for <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> includes solutions for a<br />
wide variety of different plant engineering<br />
requirements.<br />
Where devices for protection against<br />
overcurrents and direct and indirect contacts<br />
and the provisions aiming to improve<br />
reliability and safety of emergency<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>s are concerned, see the relative<br />
standards.<br />
Switching from the normal to the emergency<br />
power supply can be carried out<br />
manually (locally or by remote control)<br />
or automatically.<br />
To this end, the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> used for<br />
switching must be fitted with the accessories<br />
required to allow electric remote<br />
control and provide the electrical and<br />
mechanical interlocks required by the<br />
switching logic.<br />
These include:<br />
– the shunt opening release<br />
– the shunt closing release<br />
– the motor operator<br />
– the auxiliary contacts.<br />
The switching function can be automated<br />
using a suitable electronicallycontrolled<br />
relay <strong>circuit</strong>, to be installed by<br />
the customer (<strong>circuit</strong> diagram supplied<br />
by ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.).<br />
The mechanical interlocks between two<br />
or three <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are created using<br />
cables which are suitable both for<br />
horizontally and vertically installed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
83
Spare parts and retrofitting<br />
Spare parts<br />
– Front metal shields and escutcheon plate<br />
– Opening solenoid for <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 - PR112 overcurrent release<br />
– Arcing chamber<br />
– Closing springs<br />
– Plier isolating contact for fixed part of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
– Sliding earthing contact (for withdrawable version)<br />
– Shutters for fixed part<br />
– Complete pole<br />
– Control device<br />
– Cables for connecting releases and current transformers to<br />
each other<br />
– Transparent protection for releases<br />
– <strong>SACE</strong> PR110/B power supply unit.<br />
84<br />
<strong>Emax</strong>0474<br />
Retrofitting kits<br />
Special kits, including <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, are available<br />
for replacing old <strong>SACE</strong> Otomax and <strong>SACE</strong> Novomax G30<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, using all the components of existing switchboards.<br />
Fitting the new in the old has unquestionable technical<br />
and economic benefits, is very quick to perform and uses<br />
the existing main switchboard connections.
CONTENTS<br />
Applications of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Primary and secondary distribution 86<br />
Selectivity tables 90<br />
Earth fault protection 91<br />
Switching and protection of transformers 96<br />
Protection of lines 97<br />
Switching and protection of generators 98<br />
Switching and protection of asynchronous motors 100<br />
Switching and protection of capacitors 102<br />
85
Primary and secondary distribution<br />
Back-up protection<br />
Back-up protection is provided for by Standards CEI 64-8 and<br />
IEC 364-4-437, which allow the use of a protection device with<br />
a breaking capacity lower than the prospective short-<strong>circuit</strong><br />
current in the point where it is installed, on condition that there<br />
is another protection device with the necessary breaking capacity<br />
on the supply side. In this case the characteristics of<br />
the two devices must be coordinated in such a way that the<br />
specific energy (I 2 t) which the device on the supply side lets<br />
through is not higher than that which can be withstood without<br />
damage by the device on the load side and by the protected<br />
conductors.<br />
In the diagram in the figure, <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker B, located on the<br />
load side of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker A, can have a lower breaking capacity<br />
than the prospective short-<strong>circuit</strong> current in the event of<br />
a fault in “C”, if <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker A is able to satisfy both the<br />
following conditions:<br />
ASEM0038<br />
– it has a suitable breaking capacity (greater than or equal to<br />
the prospective short-<strong>circuit</strong> current in its point of installation<br />
and obviously greater than the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current in “C”)<br />
– in the event of a fault in “C” with short-<strong>circuit</strong> values higher<br />
than the breaking capacity of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker B, <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
A must provide a specific let-through energy limiting<br />
function, limiting it to a value that can be withstood by <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
B and the protected conductors.<br />
A fault in “C” can therefore cause a double interruption, however<br />
the back-up protection must ensure that B always trips<br />
within the limits of its breaking capacity.<br />
It is necessary to choose switchgear combinations which have<br />
been verified in laboratory tests for this type of protection. The<br />
combinations possible are specified in ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. documents<br />
(Slide rules, DOC) and shown here for the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
86<br />
Back-up protection is used in electrical installations where<br />
continuous operation is not an essential requirement, since<br />
the opening of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker on the supply side also cuts<br />
out users which are not affected by the fault. However, the<br />
adoption of this type of coordination allows one to limit the size<br />
of the installation and therefore reduce costs.<br />
Note<br />
Back-up protection can also be implemented on more than two levels. The<br />
figure below shows an example of coordination on three levels. In this<br />
case the choices are correct if at least one of the two situations below is<br />
verified:<br />
– the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker furthest on the supply side A is coordinated both<br />
with <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> B and C (coordination between <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> B<br />
and C is not necessary);<br />
– each <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is coordinated with the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker immediately<br />
on the load side of it, which is to say the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker furthest on the<br />
supply side A is coordinated with the next one B, which is in turn coordinated<br />
with <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker C.<br />
ASEM0039<br />
Table showing coordination for back-up protection<br />
C.-breaker on the supply side Breaking capacity<br />
E2L - E3L 130 [kA] (a 380/415 V)<br />
Circuit-breaker Breaking capacity on<br />
on the load side outgoing lines with back-up<br />
S5N 65 [kA<br />
S5H - S6N - E1B - E2B 85 [kA]<br />
S6S - S6H - S7S - S7H - E2N 100 [kA]
Example<br />
The installation section considered has the characteristics<br />
shown in the figure.<br />
Chain of <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
in installations<br />
with series<br />
(back-up) protection<br />
ASEM0040<br />
Example of use of limitation<br />
curves<br />
ASEM0041<br />
A<br />
B<br />
Ib = 1300 A<br />
400 V<br />
Icc = 100 kA<br />
Ib = 350 A<br />
Load<br />
Electrical characteristics of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
In the most frequent case, where the short-<strong>circuit</strong> occurs close<br />
to the user (U), normally located at a certain distance from the<br />
main switchboard, the level of the fault current may be less<br />
than 30 kA. Selective operation of the chain selected must be<br />
ensured for values of less than 30 kA.<br />
Conversely, the fault current values will be higher when the<br />
short- <strong>circuit</strong> occurs on the busbars or close to the user <strong>circuit</strong>breaker.<br />
Fast tripping of the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2L16 <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
puts the distribution switchboard out of service, protecting both<br />
the installation and the switchgear installed in it, but in this<br />
case the continued service of those users not affected by the<br />
fault is not ensured.<br />
According to the current limitation curves, the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
E2L16 <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker on its own reduces the peak current value<br />
to 120 kA for a prospective peak current of 220 kA with the<br />
fault level considered (100 kA). The peak value of the current<br />
effectively limited is 120 kA, corresponding to a limited effective<br />
current of only 55 kA. This value allows a <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax S5H<br />
400 <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker with PR211 release to be used as the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
on the load side.<br />
Reference Operating Type Rated uninterrupted Breaking Selectivity<br />
current current capacities limit<br />
[A] Iu [A] Icu [kA] [kA]<br />
A 1300 <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2L16 1600 130 30<br />
B 400 <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax S5H 400 400 65 30<br />
prospective Icc<br />
limited Icc<br />
87
Primary and secondary distribution<br />
Selective protection<br />
Selectivity is normally actuated for tripping overcurrent protection<br />
devices in civil and industrial installations to isolate the<br />
part affected by a fault from the system, causing only the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
immediately on the supply side of the fault to trip.<br />
The example in the figure below highlights the need to coordinate<br />
the trip between the two <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> A and B so that<br />
only <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker B is tripped in the event of a fault in C,<br />
ensuring continuity of service for the rest of the system powered<br />
by <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker A.<br />
Whereas natural selectivity within the overload current range<br />
is normally found due to the difference between the rated currents<br />
of the user protection <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker and the main <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
on the supply side, selectivity can be obtained in<br />
the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current range by differentiating the current<br />
values and, if necessary, the trip times.<br />
Selectivity can be total or partial:<br />
– total selectivity: only <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker B opens for all the current<br />
values lower than or equal to the maximum short-<strong>circuit</strong><br />
current in C;<br />
– partial selectivity: only <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker B opens for fault currents<br />
below a given value, while <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> A and B<br />
trip for equal or higher values.<br />
Circuit diagram with<br />
selective<br />
coordination of the<br />
protection devices.<br />
ASEM0043<br />
In principle, the following types of selectivity are possible:<br />
Current-type selectivity, obtained by setting the instantaneous<br />
trip currents of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker chain to different values<br />
(higher settings for the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> on the supply side).<br />
Mainly used in terminal distribution installations where the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
feature instantaneous trip protection. The result<br />
is often partial selectivity.<br />
Time-type selectivity, obtained by intentionally incorporating<br />
increasing time-delays in the trip times of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
88<br />
ASEM0042<br />
furthest on the supply side in the chain. The relationship between<br />
the trip thresholds on the supply side and on the load<br />
side must be greater than 1.5 in the same way as for currenttype<br />
selectivity. In this case one must make sure that the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
with delayed trip have an Icw current value that<br />
is suitable for the most severe situation that can be envisaged<br />
in the point of installation (maximum current envisaged - timedelay<br />
set). Time-type selectively requires a time-delay of at<br />
least 100 ms to be set in relation to the trip time of the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
on the load side.<br />
All versions of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 microprocessorbased<br />
releases have protection function S and are therefore<br />
suitable for time-type selectively (see chapter on overcurrent<br />
releases).<br />
ASEM0044
Example of time-type selectivity<br />
Switchboar<br />
Switchboard Switchboar<br />
Switchboard<br />
d A<br />
A<br />
Switch- SwitchSwitch- boar board boar d B<br />
B<br />
ASEM0045<br />
S6H 630<br />
with PR112<br />
E2N20<br />
with PR111<br />
2500 kV<br />
1500 (fault kVA current 57.5 kA)<br />
10 / 0,38 kV<br />
E4 S40<br />
with PR112<br />
E2N20 MS (isolator)<br />
Zone selectivity, applicable to protection functions S and G.<br />
This type of selectivity allows shorter trip times for the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
closest to the fault to be obtained than in the case of<br />
time-type selectivity.<br />
The word zone is used to refer to the part of an installation<br />
between two <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in series. Each <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
which detects a fault communicates this to the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
on the supplyside using a simple connection wire. The fault<br />
zone is the zone immediately on the load side of the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
which detects the fault but does not receive any communication<br />
from those on the load side. This <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
opens without waiting for the time-delay set.<br />
All <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in versions B-N-S-H-V with a<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR112 release allow zone selectivity to be made.<br />
Note<br />
For selectivity in the event of earth faults with <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in series see<br />
page 91.<br />
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. provides important calculation tools to facilitate<br />
the work of designers in co-ordinating protection devices including<br />
the Slide rule kits, DOC and C.A.T. software packages.<br />
10 3<br />
10 2<br />
10<br />
1<br />
10 -1<br />
10 -2<br />
8<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
8<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
8<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
8<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
8<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
T (s)<br />
I (A)<br />
2 4 6 8<br />
102 103 104 105 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8<br />
ASEM0047<br />
Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
The co-ordination tables below are for the part regarding L<br />
(current-limiting) versions of <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
89<br />
ASEM0046
Selectivity tables<br />
Circuit-breaker<br />
on the supply<br />
side<br />
Notes:<br />
– T = total selectivity<br />
– The selectivity is expressed in kA at the power supply <strong>voltage</strong> of 380-<br />
415 V a.c. in conformity with the CEI EN 60947-2 Standards.<br />
– The values shown in the table are in relation to either the maximum<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> current for which selectivity is ensured or the maximum<br />
breaking capacity of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker on the load side.<br />
– <strong>SACE</strong> PR111-112 and <strong>SACE</strong> PR211-212 releases offer many different<br />
possible time-current settings for functions LSI.<br />
90<br />
Selectivity tables for <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> current-limiting <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
Circuit-breaker E2L 12 - E2L 16 E3L 20 - E3L 25<br />
on the load side<br />
In [A] 250 400 800 1250 1600 1250 1600 2000 2500<br />
In [A] Im [A] 3000 4800 10000 10000 10000 15000 15000 15000 15000<br />
10 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
12.5 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
16 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
20 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
S1B 25 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
S1N 32 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
S2B 40 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
S2N 50 500 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
S2S 63 630 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
S3N<br />
S3H<br />
S3L<br />
S4N-H-L<br />
PR211<br />
80 800 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
100 1000 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
125 1250 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
160 1600 16/18 T T T T T T T T<br />
32 500 8.5 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
50 500 8.5 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
80 800 8.5 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
100 1000 8.5 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
125 1250 8.5 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
160 1600 8.5 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
200 2000 14 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
250 2500 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61 35/61<br />
100 1200 8.5 14.5 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55<br />
160 1920 8.5 14.5 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55<br />
250 3000 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55 35/55<br />
S5N-H-L 320 3840 30 30 30 30 30 30 30<br />
PR211 400 4800 30 30 30 30 30 30 30<br />
S6N-S-H-L 630 7560<br />
PR211 800 9600<br />
S7S-H-L<br />
PR211<br />
1000 12000<br />
1250 15000<br />
1600 19200<br />
S4N-H-L<br />
PR212<br />
100<br />
160<br />
250<br />
1200<br />
1920<br />
3000<br />
8.5<br />
8.5<br />
14.5<br />
14.5<br />
35/65/78<br />
35/65/78<br />
35/65/78<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
T<br />
S5N-H-L 320 3840 35/39 T T T T T T<br />
PR212 400 4800 35/39 T T T T T T<br />
S6N-S-H-L 630 7560 35/55 T T T T T<br />
PR212 800 9600 T T T T T<br />
S7S-H-L<br />
PR212<br />
1000 12000 34 35/42<br />
1250 15000 35/42<br />
1600 19200<br />
The table below takes the following settings into consideration<br />
Releases<br />
TM I1 = 1 x Ith I3 = 10 x Ith<br />
PR211 I1 = 1 x In I3 = 12 x Ith<br />
PR212 I1 = 1 x In I2 = OFF I3 = 12 x Ith t1 = curve D<br />
PR111 I1 = 1 x In I2 = 10 x In I3 = 12 x Ith t2 = curve D<br />
PR112 I1 = 1 x In I2 = 10 x In I3 = 12 x Ith t2 = 72 s
Earth fault protection<br />
Circuit-<strong>breakers</strong> with protection function<br />
“G”<br />
Circuit-<strong>breakers</strong> fitted with releases offering earth fault protection<br />
function “G” are usually used in MV/LV distribution substations<br />
both to protect the transformers and distribution lines.<br />
The protection function “G” detects the residual current of the<br />
sum of the currents detected by the current transformers on<br />
the phases and on neutral. Its use is effective in TT, IT, and TN-<br />
S electrical installations and, limited to the section of the installation<br />
having its neutral conductor (N) branched and separated<br />
from conductor PE, also in TN-CS systems. Protection<br />
function “G” is not used in TN-C systems since they provide<br />
the neutral and protection functions using a single conductor.<br />
The protection device thresholds and trip times can be selected<br />
from a wide range, also making it easy to obtain selectivity<br />
for this type of fault with regard to the protection devices<br />
TT<br />
TN-C<br />
TN-S<br />
IT<br />
Z<br />
massa<br />
massa<br />
massa<br />
massa<br />
L1<br />
L2<br />
L3<br />
N<br />
P<br />
L1<br />
L2<br />
L3<br />
PEN<br />
L1<br />
L2<br />
L3<br />
N<br />
PEN<br />
L1<br />
L2<br />
L3<br />
PE<br />
installed on the load side. Selectivity is therefore ensured regarding<br />
the residual-current releases located on the load side.<br />
Function “G” of the <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 has constant specific letthrough<br />
energy curves (I 2 t = k). On the <strong>SACE</strong> PR112, curves<br />
with trip times that are independent of the current (t = k) can<br />
also be selected.<br />
The figure below shows an example of one possible choice of<br />
earth fault protection devices and their possible settings.<br />
The protection function “G” of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> on the main<br />
switchboard A has the task of enabling them to trip selectively<br />
with respect to each other and the residual-current protection<br />
devices located on the users of the distribution switchboards B.<br />
Example of choice of earth fault protection devices and their<br />
relative settings.<br />
ASEM0052<br />
Switchboard A<br />
Switchboard B<br />
1500 kVA<br />
10 / 0,38 kV<br />
E3N25 with PR112<br />
I4 = 0.2 x Ith = 500 A<br />
t4 = 0.8 s<br />
E2N12 with PR111<br />
I4 = 0.3 x Ith = 375 A<br />
t4 = 0.4 s<br />
91
Earth fault protections<br />
Use of the toroid on the star centre of the<br />
transformer<br />
In the case of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> for protection of MV/LV transformers,<br />
the possibility of installing a toroid on the conductor<br />
connecting the star centre of the transformer to earth is provided<br />
(application allowed with the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series fitted<br />
with the range of <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 electronic releases); this way<br />
the earth fault current is determined.<br />
The following figure shows the operating principle of the toroid<br />
installed on the star centre of the transformer.<br />
GSEM0053<br />
The use of this accessory allows the protection threshold<br />
against earth fault (function G) to be independent of the size of<br />
the primary current transformers installed on the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
phases.<br />
The table below shows the main characteristics of the range<br />
of toroids (only available in the closed version).<br />
Rated current 100A, 250A, 400A, 800A<br />
External dimensions of the toroid<br />
Internal diameter of the toroid Ø = 112 mm<br />
92<br />
H<br />
W<br />
D<br />
W = 165 mm<br />
D = 160 mm<br />
H = 35 mm<br />
PSEM9031<br />
Use of the <strong>SACE</strong> RCQ switchboard<br />
electronic residual current relays<br />
The range of <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with rated current<br />
up to 2000A can be combined – if fitted with a shunt opening<br />
release to the <strong>SACE</strong> RCQ switchboard residual current relay -<br />
with a separate toroidal transformer (to be installed externally<br />
on the line conductors) and allows earth leakage currents for<br />
values between 0.03 and 30A to be determined.<br />
Thanks to the wide range of settings, the <strong>SACE</strong> RCQ switchboard<br />
relay is suitable for applications where a residual current<br />
protection system co-ordinated with the various distribution<br />
levels from the main switchboard to the final user is to be<br />
constructed.<br />
It is particularly suitable where low sensitivity residual current<br />
protection is required, for example both in partial (current-type)<br />
or total (time-type) selective chains, and for high sensitivity<br />
applications to carry out protection of people against direct<br />
contact.<br />
When the auxiliary power supply <strong>voltage</strong> drops, the opening<br />
command intervenes after a minimum time of 100ms and after<br />
the time set above 100ms.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> RCQ relay is suitable for use in the presence of<br />
alternating only earth current (Type AC), for alternating and/or<br />
pulsating current with continuous components (Type A) and is<br />
suitable for making residual current selectivity.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> RCQ relay is of the type with indirect action and<br />
acts on the release mechanism of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker by means<br />
of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker shunt opening release (to be ordered by<br />
the customer) to be housed in the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker itself.<br />
The following table shows the main characteristics of the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
RCQ relay.
<strong>SACE</strong> RCQ residual-current switchboard relay<br />
Power supply <strong>voltage</strong> d.c. [V] 80 ... 500<br />
a.c. [V] 48 ... 125<br />
Trip threshold setting IΔn<br />
- 1st range of settings [A] 0.03 - 0.05 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.5<br />
- 2nd range of settings [A] 1 - 3 - 5 - 10 - 30<br />
Trip time setting 1st range [s] 0 - 0.05 - 0.1 - 0.25<br />
Trip time setting 2nd range [s] 0.5 - 1 - 2.5 - 5<br />
Range of use of closed transformers<br />
- Toroidal transformer ∅ 60mm [A] 0.03 ... 30<br />
- Toroidal transformer ∅ 110mm [A] 0.03 ... 30<br />
Range of use of transformers which can be opened<br />
- Toroidal transformer ∅ 110mm [A] 0.3 ... 30<br />
- Toroidal transformer ∅ 180mm [A] 0.1 ... 30<br />
- Toroidal transformer ∅ 230mm [A] 0.1 ... 30<br />
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 96 x 96 x 131.5<br />
Drilling for assembly on door [mm] 92 x 92<br />
H<br />
W<br />
D<br />
Dimensions of external toroid for <strong>SACE</strong> RCQ<br />
External dimensions of toroid Closed Openable<br />
W [mm] 94 165 166 241 297<br />
D [mm] 118 160 200 236 292<br />
H [mm] 81 40 81 81 81<br />
Internal diameter Ø [mm] 60 110 110 180 230<br />
93
Switching and protection<br />
of transformers<br />
Introduction<br />
When choosing <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> to protect the LV side of MV/<br />
LV transformers, one basically needs to take the following into<br />
account:<br />
– the rated current of the transformer protected, L.V. side, which<br />
determines the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker capacity and protection<br />
function setting required;<br />
– the maximum short-<strong>circuit</strong> current in the point of installation,<br />
which determines the minimum breaking capacity that must<br />
be offered by the protection device.<br />
MV-LV substation with a single transformer<br />
The rated current of the transformer, LV side, is determined by<br />
the following equation:<br />
Sn x 103<br />
In =<br />
3 x U20 in which<br />
Sn = rated power of the transformer,<br />
in kVA<br />
U = rated <strong>voltage</strong> of secondary<br />
20<br />
(no-load) of transformer, in<br />
V<br />
ln = rated current of the transformer,<br />
LV side, in A (rms<br />
value)<br />
94<br />
ASEM0055<br />
U 20<br />
Icc<br />
Sn<br />
In<br />
The three-phase short-<strong>circuit</strong> current at full <strong>voltage</strong>, immediately<br />
at the LV terminals of the transformer, can be expressed by the<br />
following equation (assuming infinite power at the primary):<br />
in which:<br />
In x 100<br />
Icn =<br />
Ucc%<br />
Ucc % = short-<strong>circuit</strong> <strong>voltage</strong> of the transformer in %<br />
ln = rated current, LV side, in A (rms value)<br />
lcn = rated three-phase short-<strong>circuit</strong> current, LV side, in<br />
A (rms value)<br />
The short-<strong>circuit</strong> current is lower than the values obtained using<br />
the equation above if the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is installed some<br />
distance away from the transformer using a cable or busbar<br />
connection, determined by the impedance of the connection.<br />
Choice of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
The table below shows a number of possible choices of <strong>SACE</strong><br />
<strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in relation to the characteristics of the<br />
transformers to be protected.<br />
Caution!<br />
The information provided is valid for the conditions indicated in the<br />
table. The calculations will need to be adjusted for different conditions<br />
and the choices modified.<br />
Sn [kVA] 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150<br />
Ucc (1) % 4 4 5 5 5 6,25 6,25 6,25 6,25<br />
In (2) [A] 722 909 1154 1443 1804 2309 2887 3608 4547<br />
Icn (2) [kA] 18 22.7 23.1 28.9 36.1 37 46.2 57.7 72.7<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong>E1B08 E1B08 E1B12 E1B12 E2B16 E2B20 E3B25 E3B32 E4S40 E6H50<br />
I’cn = Icn Ucc%<br />
(1) For different percent short-<strong>circuit</strong> <strong>voltage</strong> values U’cc% than the Ucc% values shown in the table, the rated three-phase short-<strong>circuit</strong> current<br />
Icn becomes:<br />
U’cc%<br />
(2) The values calculated are for a U 20 <strong>voltage</strong> of 400 V. For different U’ 20 values, multiply In and Icn by the following k factors:<br />
U’ 20 [V] 220 380 400 415 440 480 500 660 690<br />
k 1.82 1.05 1 0.96 0.91 0.83 0.8 0.606 0.580
MV-LV substation with several<br />
transformers in parallel<br />
The rated current of the transformer is calculated following the<br />
same procedure outlined in the previous section.<br />
The minimum breaking capacity of every protection <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
on the LV side must be higher than whichever of the<br />
following values is greatest (the example is for machine 1 in<br />
the figure and applies to three machines in parallel):<br />
– Icc1 (short-<strong>circuit</strong> current of transformer 1) in the event of a<br />
fault immediately on the load side of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker I1;<br />
– Icc2 + Icc3 (Icc2 and Icc3 = short-<strong>circuit</strong> currents of transformers<br />
2 and 3) in the event of a short-<strong>circuit</strong> on the supply<br />
side of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker I1.<br />
Circuit-<strong>breakers</strong> I4 and I5 on the outgoing lines must have a<br />
breaking capacity higher than Icc1+Icc2+Icc3. Each trans-<br />
CAUTION!<br />
The table is for the conditions specified on the previous page. The<br />
information for choosing the <strong>circuit</strong> <strong>breakers</strong> is only provided in relation to<br />
the operating current and prospective short-<strong>circuit</strong> current. To make the<br />
correct choice one also needs to consider other factors such as selectivity,<br />
back-up protection, the decision to use current-limiting <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>,<br />
etc. It is therefore essential for designers to carry out precise verification.<br />
The types of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> proposed are all from the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> series.<br />
former’s contribution to the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current is naturally attenuated<br />
by the transformer-<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker connection line (to<br />
be determined case by case).<br />
ASEM0056<br />
Circuit-breaker A (secondary of transformer) Circuit-breaker B (outgoing user line)<br />
Number of Rated Prospective Type Rated Total Prospective Rated current Iu and type of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
transformers current of the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current of current short-<strong>circuit</strong><br />
in parallel transformer current the CTs available current<br />
and related L.V. side<br />
power Sn In Icc In I<br />
[kVA] [A] [kA] [A] [A] [kA] [A] [A] [A] [A]<br />
800 1250 1600 2000<br />
1x500 722 18 E1B08 800 722 18 E1B08* — — —<br />
2x500 722 18 E1B08 800 1444 36 E2N12* E2N12* — —<br />
1x630 909 22,7 E1B12 1250 909 22,7 E1B08* — — —<br />
2x630 909 22,7 E1B12 1250 1818 22,7 E2N12* E2N12* E2N16* —<br />
3x630 909 45,4 E2N12 1250 2727 68,1 E3S12* E3S12* E3S16* —<br />
1x800 1155 23,1 E1B12 1250 1155 23,1 E1B08* — — —<br />
2x800 1155 23,1 E1B12 1250 2310 46,2 E2N12* E2N12* E2N16* —<br />
3x800 1155 46,2 E2N12 1250 3465 69,3 E3S12* E3S12* E3S16 E3S20<br />
1x1000 1443 28,9 E2B16 1600 1443 28,9 E1B08* E1B12* E2B16* —<br />
2x1000 1443 28,9 E2B16 1600 2686 57,8 E3S12* E2S12* E2S16* —<br />
3x1000 1443 57,8 E3N25 1600 4329 86,7 E2L12* E2L12* E2L16* E3H20<br />
1x1250 1804 36,1 E2B20 2000 1804 36,1 E2N12* E2N12* E2N16* —<br />
2x1250 1804 36,1 E2B20 2000 3608 72,2 E3S12* E3S12* E3S16* E3S20<br />
3x1250 1804 72,2 E3S20 2000 5412 108,3 E2L12* E2L12 E2L16 E3L20<br />
1x1600 2309 37 E3N25 2500 2309 37 E2B16* E2B16* E2B16* —<br />
2x1600 2309 37 E3N25 2500 4618 74 E3S12* E3S12* E3S16* E3S20<br />
3x1600 2309 74 E3S25 2500 6927 111 E2L12* E2L12 E2L16 E3L20<br />
1x2000 2887 46,2 E3N32 3200 2887 46,2 E2N12* E2N12* E2N16* —<br />
2x2000 2887 46,2 E3N32 3200 5774 92,4 E2L12* E2L12* E2L16* E3H20<br />
1x2500 3608 57,7 E4S40 4000 3608 57,7 E3S12* E3S12* E3S16* E3S20<br />
1x3150 4547 72,7 E6H50 5000 4547 72,7 E3S12* E3S12* E3S16* E3S20<br />
C.-breaker A C.-breaker B<br />
Positions marked by an asterisk (*) are suitable for other possible choices<br />
from the moulded-case <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in the <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax series.<br />
One also needs to bear in mind that the short-<strong>circuit</strong> currents shown in the<br />
table have been calculated on the assumption of infinite power on the<br />
supply side of the transformers and without taking the impedances of the<br />
busbars and connections to the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> into account. The values<br />
calculated in this way are higher than the actual values.<br />
95
Protection of lines<br />
One needs to know the following information to make the correct<br />
choice of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> for switching and protecting lines:<br />
– the operating current of the line I B<br />
– the capacity of the cable IZ – the prospective short-<strong>circuit</strong> current Icc in the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
point of installation.<br />
See the regulations in force and the specific publications for<br />
determining I B , I z and Icc.<br />
To be suitable, the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker must satisfy the following<br />
conditions:<br />
– have a breaking capacity (Icu / Ics) greater than or equal to<br />
the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current Icc<br />
– have a protection release that enables its overload setting<br />
current In (I1) to satisfy the relationship I < In < I B Z<br />
– the specific let-through energy (I2t) let through by the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
must be less than or equal to that withstood by the<br />
cable.<br />
The CEI 64-8 Standards consider that overload protection in<br />
the release of a level appropriate for the cable is also sufficient<br />
to protect the cable in the event of a short <strong>circuit</strong> at the end of<br />
the line.<br />
Circuits for which it is recommended or necessary not to provide<br />
overload protection, or for which this protection must be<br />
set to values higher than between I B and I Z , require one to verify<br />
that the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current at the end of the line is higher than<br />
the trip threshold of the short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection device so that<br />
the latter can trip, ensuring protection. This in effect establishes<br />
the maximum lengths protected in relation to the various<br />
different cross-sections of the cables and the various different<br />
settings of the short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection devices.<br />
96<br />
Note<br />
For protection against indirect contact, it may be necessary to link the<br />
setting of the short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection to the length of the line protected.<br />
Consult the Slide rule kits and DOC software packages for the calculation<br />
procedures required.<br />
The wide range of settings offered by the <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112 releases<br />
always allows the most suitable choice.<br />
Concerning the verification required by the CEI 64-8 Standards, which<br />
stipulate that the overload protection must have a trip current If which<br />
ensures operation for a value less than 1.45 Iz (If < 1.45 Iz), this condition<br />
is always satisfied since <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> conform to the CEI<br />
EN 60947-2 Standards and this value is 1.3 In.<br />
Special attention must be devoted to the selective co-ordination of <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
in series to limit disservice in the event of faults.
Switching and protection of generators<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are suitable for use with low <strong>voltage</strong><br />
generators employed in the following applications:<br />
A - back-up generators for essential users<br />
B - generators in insulated operation<br />
C - generators for small power stations connected in parallel<br />
with other generators and, possibly, with the power supply<br />
network.<br />
In cases A and B, the generator does not operate in parallel<br />
with the power supply network: the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current<br />
therefore depends on the generator itself and, possibly, the<br />
users connected. The short-<strong>circuit</strong> current is formed following<br />
complex phenomena. To evaluate it one needs to know the<br />
reactances and time constants typical of the machine, making<br />
it necessary to refer to the DOC program or specialist texts.<br />
Here one can simply note that low short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection device<br />
settings are normally required (2 ÷ 4 times In).<br />
In case C, the breaking capacity must be determined by<br />
evaluating the short-<strong>circuit</strong> current imposed by the network in<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker point of installation.<br />
The wide setting range offered by <strong>SACE</strong> PR111 and PR112<br />
microprocessor-based releases makes <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
perfectly suited to the protection of large generators.<br />
Protection function “I” allows settings between 1.5 and 12 x In<br />
(PR111) and between 1.5 and 15 x In (PR112). It is also possible<br />
to have a trip current range of 0.6 to 10 x In with function “S”.<br />
If the symmetrical short-<strong>circuit</strong> current is less than the rated<br />
current of the generator, it will be necessary to adopt solutions<br />
providing <strong>voltage</strong> control. The following solutions are described<br />
by way of example.<br />
– Indirect current protection with <strong>voltage</strong> control acting on the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker opening release;<br />
– under<strong>voltage</strong> release with electronic time-deley device.<br />
Table for choosing <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> for<br />
protection of generators<br />
The table shows the rated currents of the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in<br />
relation to the electrical characteristics of the generators. To<br />
choose the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker one needs to define the breaking<br />
capacity required by the application. The microprocessorbased<br />
protection releases available are suitable for all requirements.<br />
Frequency 50 Hz - Voltage 400 V Frequency 60 Hz - Voltage 450 V<br />
Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated<br />
power current current power current current<br />
of alternator of alternator of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker of alternator of alternator of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
[kVA] [A] [A] [kVA] [A] [A]<br />
630 909 1250 760 975 1250<br />
710 1025 1250 850 1091 1250<br />
800 1155 1250 960 1232 1250<br />
900 1299 1600 1080 1386 1600<br />
1000 1443 1600 1200 1540 1600<br />
1120 1617 2000 1344 - 1350 1724 - 1732 2000<br />
1250 1804 2000 1500 1925 2000<br />
1400 2021 2500 1650 - 1680 - 1700 2117 - 2155 - 2181 2500<br />
1600 2309 2500 1920 - 1900 2463 - 2438 2500<br />
1800 2598 3200 2160 - 2150 2771 - 2758 3200<br />
2000 2887 3200 2400 3079 3200<br />
2250 3248 4000 2700 3464 4000<br />
2500 3608 4000 3000 3849 4000<br />
2800 4041 5000 3360 4311 5000<br />
3150 4547 5000 3780 4850 5000<br />
3500 5052 6300 4200 5389 6300<br />
97
Switching and protection of asynchronous motors<br />
<strong>Low</strong>-<strong>voltage</strong> automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> can ensure the following<br />
functions on their own in the power supply <strong>circuit</strong>s for asynchronous<br />
motors:<br />
– switching<br />
– overload protection<br />
– short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection<br />
98<br />
GSEM0140<br />
M<br />
A = Circuit-breaker<br />
B = Overload protection (inverse long time-delay trip)<br />
C = Short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection (instantaneous)<br />
M = Asynchronous motor<br />
Diagram showing direct starting of asynchronous motor using only<br />
the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker fitted with a microprocessor-based overcurrent<br />
release.<br />
This solution is particularly suitable if the switching frequency<br />
is not high, as is normally the case for large motors. In this<br />
case, using only the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker for the switching and protection<br />
of the motor represents a solution that is highly advantageous<br />
due to its competitive cost-efficiency, reliability, ease<br />
of installation and maintenance and compact dimensions.<br />
The automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in the <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> selective (not<br />
current-limiting) series are able to provide the motor switching<br />
and protection function by virtue of their high breaking capacities<br />
and the wide range of possible settings offered by the<br />
microprocessor-based releases.<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> are suitable for use with motors<br />
with rated powers within the range 220 kW to 630 kW. Motors<br />
with powers of up to 250 kW can also use the moulded-case<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in the <strong>SACE</strong> Isomax and <strong>SACE</strong> Limitor series.<br />
Medium <strong>voltage</strong> power supplies are normally used for powers<br />
above 630 kW.<br />
The switching of three-phase asynchronous motors demands<br />
considerable attention to the starting operation, since the current<br />
during this phase follows the typical behaviour shown in<br />
t [s]<br />
GSEM0141<br />
Behaviour of peak current values in the starting phase of a three-phase<br />
asynchronous motor.<br />
the figure, which must be taken into account when choosing<br />
the protection devices.<br />
It is essential to calculate the typical values of the times and<br />
currents indicated in the figure in order to choose the correct<br />
switching and protection devices for the motor. This data is<br />
normally provided by the manufacturer of the motor. For an<br />
approximate estimate, consult the “Guide to the installation<br />
and sizing of electrical installations” (by ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.).<br />
The following relationships generally apply:<br />
- Ia = 6 ÷ 10 Ie (Ia and Ie: rms values)<br />
- Ip = 8 ÷ 15 Ia (Ip and Ia: rms values)<br />
Note<br />
The current Ip is commonly calculated from its peak value (Ip = 1.4 ÷ 2.5<br />
Ia): the corresponding rms value is obtained by dividing the result by 1.41.<br />
I [A]<br />
Ie = Rated current of the motor<br />
Ia = Initial value of the transient starting current<br />
Ip = Maximum instantaneous value of the subtransient starting<br />
current<br />
ta = Starting time<br />
ts = Duration of transient phase
The rated current of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker must be at least 20%<br />
higher than that of the motor.<br />
The setting of the protection releases must be chosen to:<br />
– prevent slow operation in the motor starting phase.<br />
Caution!<br />
The curves of the motor and releases are directly comparable in<br />
that they both express time-current links, but have conceptually<br />
different meanings:<br />
– the motor starting curve represents the values assumed by<br />
the starting current moment by moment;<br />
– the release curve represents the currents and corresponding<br />
minimum permanence times which cause tripping of the protection<br />
device.<br />
The overload time-current curve is set correctly when it is immediately<br />
above point A (figure alongside) which identifies the top<br />
of the rectangle with sides formed respectively by the starting<br />
time “ta” and the current “Ia” thermally equivalent to the variable<br />
starting current. The difficulty of calculating point A makes it<br />
necessary to proceed by trial and error while putting the motor<br />
into service.<br />
GSEM0142<br />
t [s]<br />
I [A]<br />
– ensure the installation is protected against the overcurrents<br />
which might occur at any point on the load side of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
(including internal motor faults).<br />
The inverse long time-delay trip protection and instantaneous<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection must be set as close as possible to the<br />
motor starting curve without, however, interfering with it.<br />
Note<br />
The IEC 947-4-1 standard concerns motor starters. The following classes<br />
are considered for overload protection:<br />
Operating Trip time t (s) for I = 7.2 x I1<br />
class (I1 = release setting current)<br />
10A 2 < t < 10<br />
10 4 < t < 10<br />
20 6 < t < 20<br />
30 9 < t < 30<br />
The table specifies that the protection device must trip in a time “t” within<br />
the limits for the class when the current flowing through the device to be<br />
protected is 7.2 times the release setting current (assumed to be equal to<br />
the rated current of the motor).<br />
The division of the overload devices into classes is closely linked to the<br />
motor starting time: for example, a motor with a starting time of 18 seconds<br />
requires a protection device in class 20.<br />
The same standards provide specific prescriptions for the protection device<br />
in cases of three-phase operation or with the loss of a phase.<br />
99
Switching and protection of asynchronous motors<br />
Three-phase operation<br />
The overload protection device must ensure tripping in more<br />
than two hours with currents equal to 1.05 times the rated current<br />
of the motor and in less than two hours with currents equal<br />
to 1.2 times the same rated current, as indicated in the table<br />
below:<br />
Operation Operation with with the the loss loss of of a a phase<br />
phase<br />
Tripping must occur in less than two hours at 20°C in the event<br />
of the loss of a phase when the current in the energised poles<br />
reaches 1.15 times the rated current.<br />
Table for choosing <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> to be used for motor<br />
protection<br />
The table below shows the starting characteristics for large<br />
motors, from 220 to 630 kW, with <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in the <strong>SACE</strong><br />
<strong>Emax</strong> series for switching and protecting motors in category<br />
AC-3 - 440 V - 50 Hz.<br />
The table shows the choice of current transformers able to<br />
ensure a sufficiently high value for the instantaneous trip threshold<br />
setting (I): in the absence of experimental data it is advisable<br />
to verify that the relationship between the threshold of<br />
protection device I (I3) and the threshold of protection device<br />
L (I1) is:<br />
I3/I1 =12 ... 15.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 microprocessor-based release conforms to<br />
the IEC 947-4-1 standard, in particular the device ensures the<br />
protection of class 10A, 10, 20 and 30 motors with a trip time<br />
setting for function L at I=7.2 I1 of between 0.52s and 25s with<br />
I1 the setting current of threshold L.<br />
The <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 protection release is temperature-compensated<br />
and unaffected by phase loss.<br />
100<br />
Benefits of earth fault protection G<br />
Earth fault protection (G) is advisable to:<br />
– improve safety against fire hazards<br />
– improve protection of the motor and personnel in the event<br />
of machine faults.<br />
Benefits of thermal memory<br />
The suitability of enabling the thermal memory (option offered<br />
by <strong>SACE</strong> PR112 releases) must be evaluated in relation to the<br />
type of user. Enabling the thermal memory (which makes the<br />
microprocessor-based protection similar to that provided by a<br />
thermomagnetic device) increases the protection level of the<br />
motor in the event of restarting after tripping due to an overload.<br />
Use of the under<strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
The under<strong>voltage</strong> protection device in control systems for asynchronous<br />
motors demands particular attention, performing,<br />
amongst other things, two important functions:<br />
– it prevents simultaneous restarting of all the motors on restoration<br />
of the power supply, with the risk of causing the entire<br />
installation to go out of service by tripping the main <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
overcurrent protection devices<br />
– it prevents restarting of the motor without a control signal,<br />
which could cause a hazard for maintenance personnel or<br />
damage to the processing cycle.
I/In 1,05 1.2 1.5 7.2 Operating class<br />
Tp > 2h < 2h < 120 s 2 < t < 10s 10A<br />
< 240 s 4 < t < 10s 10<br />
< 480 s 6 < t < 20s 20<br />
< 720 s 9 < t < 30s 30<br />
Motor <strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker Microprocessor-based release<br />
Pe Ie Operations (AC-3) Type Icu In Type TA<br />
[kW] [A] [No.] [kA] [A] [A]<br />
220 408 10000 E1B E1B<br />
40 800 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
250 418 10000 E1B E1B<br />
40 800 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
315 580 10000 E1B E1B<br />
40 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
355 636 10000 E1B E1B<br />
40 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
400 710 10000 E1B E1B<br />
40 1250 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
450 800 10000 E1B E1B<br />
40 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
500 910 12000 E2B E2B<br />
40 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
560 1020 12000 E2B E2B<br />
40 1600 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
630 1140 12000 E2B E2B<br />
40 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
220 408 15000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
250 418 15000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
315 580 15000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
355 636 15000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1250 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
400 710 15000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1250 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
450 800 15000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
500 910 12000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
560 1020 12000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
630 1140 12000 E2N E2N<br />
65 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
220 408 12000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
250 418 12000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
315 580 12000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
355 636 12000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
400 710 12000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
450 800 12000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
500 910 10000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
560 1020 10000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
630 1140 10000 E3S E3S<br />
75 1600 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
220 408 12000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
250 418 12000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1250 PR112 PR112 PR112<br />
800<br />
315 580 12000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
355 636 12000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
400 710 12000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
450 800 12000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1250 PR112 PR112<br />
1250<br />
500 910 10000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
560 1020 10000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
630 1140 10000 E3H E3H<br />
100 1600 PR112 PR112<br />
1600<br />
101
Switching and protection of capacitors<br />
Operating conditions of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
during continuous service for capacitor<br />
banks<br />
In conformity with the IEC 70 and CEI 33-1 Standards, the capacitors<br />
must be able to operate in service conditions with a<br />
rated rms current of up to 1.3 times the rated current Icn of the<br />
capacitor. This prescription is due to the possible presence of<br />
harmonics in the power supply <strong>voltage</strong>.<br />
One also needs to bear in mind that a tolerance of +10% is<br />
admissible for the capacitance value corresponding to its rated<br />
power, so that the <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> for switching capacitor banks<br />
must be chosen to permanently carry a maximum current equal<br />
to:<br />
Imax = 1.3 x 1.1 x Icn = 1.43 x Icn.<br />
Current for connecting capacitor banks<br />
Connection of a capacitor bank can be compared to closing<br />
in short <strong>circuit</strong> conditions, where the transient making capacity<br />
Ip has high peak values, above all when capacitor banks<br />
are connected in parallel with others that are already powered.<br />
The value of Ip needs to be calculated for each individual situation<br />
because it depends on the individual <strong>circuit</strong> conditions<br />
and may in certain cases even have a peak value equal to 160<br />
x Icn for a duration of 1 - 2 ms.<br />
This fact must be taken into account when choosing the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker,<br />
which must have a suitable making capacity, and<br />
when setting the overcurrent release, which must not cause<br />
unwarranted trips when the bank is connected.<br />
102<br />
Selection of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
Using the information on the rating plate of the three-phase<br />
capacitor bank<br />
Qn = rated power in kVAR<br />
Un = rated <strong>voltage</strong> in V<br />
the rated current of the bank is obtained<br />
Qn x 10 3<br />
Icn = , in A.<br />
3 x Un<br />
For the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker:<br />
Rated current Iu > 1.43 Icn<br />
Overload protection setting I1 = 1.43 x Icn<br />
Short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection setting I3 = 10 x Iu<br />
Breaking capacity Icu > Icc, in the point of installation.<br />
Table for selecting the protection and<br />
switching <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> for capacitors<br />
The breaking capacity of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker must take the prospective<br />
short-<strong>circuit</strong> current in the point of installation into<br />
account. The models possible are shown in the table.<br />
Maximum power of the Circuit- Rated Rated Overload Short-<strong>circuit</strong><br />
capacitor bank at 50 Hz breaker current of the current of the protection protection<br />
(kVAR) current capacitor setting setting<br />
transformer bank<br />
380 V 440 V 500 V 600 V 660 V 690 V In [A] Icn [A] I1 [A] I3 [A]<br />
575 667 758 909 1000 1044 E1 - E2 - E3 1250 875 1x In 10 x In<br />
736 853 970 1164 1280 1336 E2 - E3 1600 1120 1x In 10 x In<br />
920 1067 1212 1455 1600 1671 E2 - E3 2000 1400 1x In 10 x In<br />
1150 1334 1515 1819 2000 2088 E3 2500 1750 1x In 10 x In<br />
1473 1705 1938 2325 2558 2674 E3 - E4 - E6 3200 2238 1x In 10 x In
CONTENTS<br />
Overall dimensions<br />
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker 104<br />
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker 108<br />
Mechanical interlock 113<br />
Circuit-breaker accessories 114<br />
103
Overall dimensions<br />
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P84-BN<br />
33<br />
104<br />
Basic version with horizontal rear terminals<br />
252<br />
4<br />
242<br />
2<br />
252 242<br />
M10<br />
1<br />
N<br />
Y<br />
A<br />
B<br />
Y<br />
A<br />
C<br />
D<br />
397<br />
Y<br />
4 POL<br />
307<br />
3 POL<br />
View A<br />
4<br />
90<br />
35<br />
90 90<br />
60<br />
ø1<br />
View A<br />
33<br />
18<br />
N<br />
2<br />
Max +40<br />
Max +40<br />
1<br />
M10<br />
45<br />
240<br />
330<br />
Y<br />
541<br />
415<br />
126 126 126<br />
35<br />
63<br />
348<br />
474<br />
3 POL<br />
3 POL<br />
4 POL<br />
418<br />
96<br />
4 POL<br />
3<br />
80<br />
E<br />
440 min.<br />
379<br />
X X<br />
F E<br />
312<br />
ø1<br />
3<br />
18<br />
G<br />
16.5<br />
E1/E2 E4<br />
E3<br />
View A<br />
E1<br />
E2<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
E6<br />
A B C D E<br />
386<br />
386<br />
530<br />
656<br />
908<br />
296<br />
296<br />
404<br />
566<br />
782<br />
148<br />
148<br />
202<br />
238<br />
328<br />
148<br />
148<br />
202<br />
328<br />
454<br />
10<br />
26<br />
26<br />
26<br />
26<br />
3 POL<br />
4 POL<br />
4 POL<br />
3 POL<br />
3 POL<br />
4 POL<br />
F G<br />
130 117.5<br />
114 117.5<br />
114 117.5<br />
166 91.5<br />
166 91.5<br />
33<br />
E6<br />
5<br />
177<br />
4<br />
View A<br />
66<br />
66<br />
33<br />
2<br />
252 242<br />
M10<br />
Max +40<br />
33<br />
66<br />
2<br />
49<br />
89 50<br />
10<br />
4<br />
252 242<br />
M10<br />
Max +40<br />
1<br />
96<br />
35 35<br />
N<br />
1<br />
192.5<br />
60<br />
N<br />
Max<br />
Min<br />
Y<br />
180<br />
577<br />
35<br />
180<br />
600<br />
Y<br />
13<br />
150<br />
135<br />
45<br />
510<br />
667<br />
180 180<br />
252<br />
793<br />
63<br />
726<br />
919<br />
189<br />
252<br />
35 35 56 35 35<br />
Caption<br />
1 Inside edge of compartment door<br />
2 Segregation (when provided)<br />
3 M10 mounting holes for fixed part<br />
(use M10 screws)<br />
4 1 x M12 screw(E1, E2, E3) or<br />
2 x M12 scrws (E4, E6) for earthing<br />
(supplied as standard)<br />
5 Insulating wall or insulated metal wall<br />
852<br />
Y<br />
252<br />
222<br />
252<br />
3 POL<br />
ø1<br />
18<br />
3<br />
222<br />
4 POL<br />
3<br />
3 POL<br />
ø1<br />
18<br />
4 POL<br />
ø1<br />
3<br />
18
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P85-BN<br />
Version with vertical rear terminals<br />
E1 E2/E4 E3/E6<br />
166<br />
80<br />
35<br />
104.5<br />
20<br />
90<br />
90<br />
10<br />
ø1<br />
A A A<br />
50 48<br />
166<br />
80<br />
35<br />
104.5<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
50 48<br />
N N<br />
90<br />
90<br />
10 10<br />
10<br />
N<br />
166<br />
100<br />
35<br />
104.5<br />
20<br />
View A View A View A<br />
180<br />
135<br />
90<br />
10 10<br />
10<br />
252<br />
189<br />
126<br />
126<br />
126<br />
10 10 10 10<br />
12 12 12<br />
12 12 12<br />
ø1<br />
50 48<br />
E1 E2 E3<br />
M12 screws<br />
supplied<br />
as standard<br />
E4 E6<br />
N<br />
N<br />
105
Overall dimensions<br />
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P86-BN<br />
106<br />
Version with front terminals<br />
460<br />
460<br />
E1 E2<br />
460<br />
10<br />
42.5<br />
68<br />
35 60<br />
90 90<br />
E3 E4<br />
10<br />
E6<br />
10<br />
10<br />
20 20<br />
88<br />
42.5<br />
10<br />
20 20<br />
88<br />
42.5<br />
126<br />
252<br />
N<br />
35 96<br />
126<br />
N<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
N<br />
56<br />
222<br />
35 96<br />
189<br />
460<br />
460<br />
10<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
10<br />
10<br />
20 20<br />
88<br />
10<br />
20 20<br />
88<br />
42.5<br />
42.5<br />
35 60<br />
90 90<br />
180<br />
N<br />
135<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
N<br />
35 60<br />
150<br />
20<br />
ø1
Fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P87-BN<br />
Dimensions of compartment Holes in compartment door<br />
500<br />
73.5<br />
E1<br />
E2<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
E6<br />
20<br />
B<br />
A B<br />
400<br />
400<br />
500<br />
700<br />
1000<br />
A<br />
135<br />
180<br />
490<br />
490<br />
630<br />
790<br />
1130<br />
3 POLI<br />
4 POLI<br />
Holes for passing through flexible<br />
cables for mechanical interlocks<br />
10<br />
242 Min<br />
282 Max<br />
38.5<br />
40<br />
Depth<br />
N E1/E2 2 2<br />
N<br />
X 339 100<br />
374 384 X<br />
2 holes for IP54<br />
protection<br />
N<br />
N<br />
R2<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
E6<br />
Y<br />
316<br />
306<br />
ø5 100 100<br />
100<br />
100<br />
168.5<br />
Tightening torque for main terminals 70 Nm<br />
Tightening torque for earthing screw Nm 70<br />
150<br />
Y<br />
ø5<br />
High strength M12 screw<br />
Number per terminal<br />
PHASE NEUTRAL<br />
3 3<br />
4 2<br />
6 3<br />
107
Overall Dimensions<br />
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P88-BN<br />
33<br />
393.5<br />
380<br />
108<br />
Basic version with horizontal rear terminals<br />
15<br />
1<br />
4<br />
E1<br />
E2<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
E6<br />
Y A<br />
A<br />
B<br />
461<br />
E<br />
465<br />
X<br />
140 E<br />
124.5<br />
2<br />
2<br />
45<br />
129<br />
4<br />
183<br />
528<br />
138<br />
240<br />
200 200<br />
90<br />
60<br />
417<br />
90 90<br />
4 POL<br />
15<br />
126<br />
96<br />
561<br />
126 126<br />
4 POL<br />
15<br />
60<br />
135<br />
150<br />
687<br />
180 180<br />
N<br />
45<br />
33<br />
N<br />
63<br />
33<br />
N<br />
174<br />
309<br />
618<br />
3 393.5<br />
33<br />
40<br />
3<br />
393.5<br />
33<br />
40<br />
380<br />
84<br />
380<br />
84<br />
220<br />
199.5<br />
465<br />
min<br />
Y<br />
597<br />
180<br />
150 35 35 35<br />
5<br />
3<br />
34 13<br />
ø1<br />
1<br />
370<br />
F<br />
ø1<br />
1<br />
245<br />
F<br />
245<br />
ø1<br />
Y<br />
E6<br />
252<br />
813<br />
252<br />
3 POL<br />
222 35 35 56 35 35<br />
ø1<br />
A B C D E<br />
414<br />
414<br />
558<br />
684<br />
936<br />
324<br />
324<br />
432<br />
594<br />
810<br />
3 POL<br />
162<br />
162<br />
216<br />
252<br />
342<br />
4 POL<br />
C 3 POL<br />
D<br />
4 POL<br />
56 240 49<br />
Y<br />
Y<br />
Y<br />
E1/E2 327<br />
90 90<br />
3 POL E3<br />
435<br />
126 126<br />
3 POL<br />
E4<br />
60 35 ø1<br />
96 35 35 ø1<br />
View A View A<br />
Caption<br />
1 Inside edge of compartment door<br />
2 Segregation (when provided)<br />
3 10 Ø mounting holes for fixed part (use M8 screws)<br />
4 1 x M12 screw(E1, E2, E3) or 2 x M12 screws<br />
(E4, E6) for earthing (supplied as standard)<br />
5 Travel from connected for TEST to isolated<br />
F Fixed part ventilation drilling<br />
162<br />
162<br />
216<br />
342<br />
468<br />
122<br />
10<br />
8<br />
8<br />
8<br />
8<br />
E1 E2 / E3 / E4 / E6<br />
F<br />
3 POL 4 POL<br />
–<br />
–<br />
370<br />
530<br />
750<br />
–<br />
–<br />
490<br />
610<br />
870<br />
33<br />
View A<br />
15<br />
33<br />
393.5 40<br />
380<br />
84<br />
122<br />
1<br />
96<br />
N<br />
189<br />
E<br />
10<br />
465<br />
X<br />
140 E<br />
10<br />
124.5 E<br />
View A<br />
122<br />
63<br />
744<br />
310 310<br />
222<br />
5,5 Max<br />
56<br />
939<br />
252 252<br />
870<br />
240 49<br />
370 370<br />
F<br />
199.5<br />
6<br />
465<br />
min<br />
ø1<br />
2<br />
4<br />
X<br />
3 POL<br />
2<br />
4<br />
ø1<br />
4 POL<br />
3<br />
3<br />
4 POL
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P89-BN<br />
Version with vertical rear terminals<br />
E1 E2/E4 E3/E6<br />
114<br />
80<br />
35<br />
ø1<br />
137.5<br />
137.5<br />
20<br />
90<br />
90<br />
10<br />
A A A<br />
50 3<br />
N<br />
114<br />
80<br />
35<br />
137.5<br />
20<br />
90<br />
10<br />
10<br />
10<br />
90<br />
180 90<br />
10<br />
10<br />
10<br />
90<br />
135<br />
ø1<br />
50 3<br />
N<br />
N<br />
134<br />
100<br />
35<br />
127.5<br />
20<br />
View A View A View A<br />
126<br />
126<br />
252<br />
12<br />
10<br />
12<br />
10<br />
12<br />
126<br />
189<br />
10 10<br />
12 12 12<br />
ø1<br />
50 3<br />
E1 E2 E3<br />
M12 screws<br />
supplied<br />
as standard<br />
E4 E6<br />
N<br />
N<br />
109
Overall Dimensions<br />
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P90-BN<br />
460<br />
10<br />
460<br />
460<br />
110<br />
Version with front terminals<br />
E1 E2<br />
10<br />
E3<br />
35.5<br />
71<br />
20 20<br />
91<br />
E6<br />
10<br />
10<br />
35.5<br />
10<br />
20 20<br />
91<br />
35.5<br />
90 90<br />
N<br />
35 60<br />
35 35 100<br />
126 126<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
N<br />
90 90<br />
N<br />
35 60<br />
10<br />
N 10<br />
N<br />
35 35 100<br />
126 126<br />
252 189<br />
460<br />
10<br />
E4<br />
460<br />
10<br />
20 20<br />
91<br />
20 20<br />
91<br />
35.5<br />
35.5<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
60 60<br />
70<br />
180 135<br />
20<br />
ø1<br />
60 ø1<br />
20
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P91-BN<br />
Version with flat terminals<br />
114<br />
137.5<br />
90<br />
90<br />
M12<br />
35<br />
A<br />
A<br />
E1 E2/E6<br />
3<br />
45 62<br />
60 N<br />
60<br />
N<br />
90<br />
90<br />
180<br />
35<br />
150 35<br />
35<br />
135<br />
60<br />
35<br />
N<br />
114<br />
137.5<br />
View A View A View A<br />
M12<br />
E1 E2 E3<br />
126<br />
126<br />
View A View A<br />
252<br />
189<br />
96<br />
35<br />
222 56<br />
96<br />
35<br />
35<br />
E4 E6<br />
35<br />
3<br />
N<br />
N<br />
111
Overall Dimensions<br />
Withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
P92-BN<br />
112<br />
Dimensions of compartment Holes in compartment door<br />
500<br />
Holes for passing through flexible<br />
cables for mechanical interlocks<br />
35<br />
E1<br />
E2<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
E6<br />
20<br />
A B<br />
400<br />
400<br />
500<br />
700<br />
1000<br />
210<br />
490<br />
490<br />
630<br />
790<br />
1130<br />
B<br />
100<br />
A<br />
50<br />
35 50<br />
380<br />
3 POLI<br />
4 POLI<br />
40<br />
N E1/E2 2 2<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
X 339 100<br />
374 384 X<br />
2 holes for IP54<br />
protection<br />
R<br />
E3<br />
E4<br />
E6<br />
Y<br />
316<br />
306<br />
ø 100 100<br />
100<br />
100<br />
168.5<br />
Tightening torque for fixing screws Nm 20<br />
Tightening torque for main terminals 69 Nm<br />
Tightening torque for earthing screw Nm 70<br />
150<br />
Y<br />
ø<br />
High strength M12 screw<br />
Number per terminal<br />
3 3<br />
4 2<br />
6 3
Cable assembly interlock fitting<br />
P93-BN<br />
Min 500 - Max 750<br />
Min 500 - Max 750 Min 500 - Max 750<br />
4<br />
2<br />
2<br />
4<br />
Type A<br />
Horizontal<br />
Vertical<br />
5 6<br />
3<br />
3 4<br />
1 2<br />
5 1<br />
4<br />
Type D<br />
2<br />
6<br />
Horizontal<br />
Vertical<br />
Min 500 - Max 750 Min 500 - Max 750<br />
6<br />
4<br />
1<br />
1 2<br />
4<br />
2<br />
Type B<br />
6<br />
(emergency<br />
interlock<br />
underneath)<br />
Horizontal<br />
Vertical<br />
Min 500 - Max 750 Min 500 - Max 750<br />
3<br />
6<br />
2<br />
4<br />
2<br />
4<br />
3<br />
Type B<br />
6<br />
(emergency<br />
interlock in<br />
middle)<br />
Horizontal<br />
Vertical<br />
Horizontal interlocks<br />
Maximum distance between two<br />
interlocks 1200 mm from one<br />
interlock to the other. The cables<br />
pass under the fixed parts,<br />
following the same connection<br />
layout shown for vertical <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
Take up the excess cable by<br />
making it go through one complete<br />
turn only or an omega as<br />
shown in the figure.<br />
Min 500 - Max 750 Min 500 - Max 750<br />
5 6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Type B<br />
(emergency<br />
interlock above)<br />
Horizontal<br />
Vertical<br />
Notes<br />
2<br />
Min 500 - Max 750 Min 500 - Max 750<br />
5 6<br />
3<br />
3 4<br />
1 2<br />
5 1<br />
When fitting interlocks between two <strong>circuit</strong><strong>breakers</strong><br />
one has to make suitable holes (through<br />
the switchboard) in the mounting surface for<br />
fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> or for the fixed part of<br />
withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> in order to pass<br />
through the flexible cables, respecting the<br />
measurements shown in the figures on pages 87<br />
and 92. For vertical interlocks, align the righthand<br />
sides vertically and reduce the bends in<br />
the flexible cables to a minimum (radius R. 70<br />
mm). All the angle values of the bends which the<br />
cable passes through added together must not<br />
exceed 720°.<br />
4<br />
Type C<br />
2<br />
6<br />
Horizontal<br />
Vertical<br />
113
Overall Dimensions<br />
Circuit-breaker accessories<br />
X<br />
31,5<br />
X<br />
20<br />
P94-BN<br />
933506B<br />
114<br />
Compartment door mechanical interlock<br />
Holes in compartment<br />
door<br />
Y<br />
Y<br />
180<br />
ø6<br />
73.5<br />
Current transformer for the external<br />
neutral<br />
Minimum distance between <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker and switchboard wall<br />
Fixed version Withdrawable version<br />
933506C<br />
35<br />
Homopolar toroid
933629A<br />
PAG94B<br />
Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open/closed<br />
15 additional auxiliary contacts<br />
250<br />
“A”<br />
Fixed version<br />
A flexible cable 600 mm long is available from point "A" to<br />
point "B"<br />
50,5 50,5<br />
“A”<br />
250<br />
Withdrawable version<br />
115
116
CONTENTS<br />
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams<br />
Operating state shown 118<br />
Circuit diagram symbols 119<br />
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams 120<br />
117
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams<br />
Operating state shown<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams are for the following conditions:<br />
• withdrawable version of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, open and connected<br />
• <strong>circuit</strong>s de-energised<br />
• releases not tripped<br />
• motor operating mechanism with springs charged.<br />
118<br />
Versions<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams show withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> but<br />
are also valid for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>.<br />
Fixed version<br />
The control <strong>circuit</strong>s are between terminals XV (connector X is<br />
not supplied).<br />
With this version, the applications indicated in figures (31, 32,<br />
51) cannot be provided.<br />
Withdrawable version<br />
The control <strong>circuit</strong>s are between the poles of connector X (terminal<br />
box XV is not supplied).<br />
With this version, the application indicated in figure (52) cannot<br />
be provided.<br />
Version without overcurrent release<br />
With this version, the applications indicated in figures (3, 5,<br />
13, 41, 42, 51, 52) cannot be provided.<br />
Version with PR111 or PR112/P<br />
microprocessor-based release<br />
The PR111 and PR112/P releases are fitted with the protection<br />
unit only.<br />
With this version, the applications indicated in figures (3, 5,<br />
41, 42) for PR111 and (3, 5, 22, 42) for PR112/P, cannot be<br />
provided.<br />
Version with PR112/PD microprocessorbased<br />
release<br />
The PR112/PD overcurrent release is fitted with the protection<br />
and dialogue unit.<br />
With this version, the application shown in figure (22) cannot<br />
be fitted.
Circuit diagram symbols (IEC 617 and CEI 3-14...3-26 Standards)<br />
Timing<br />
IEC 617 02-08-05<br />
Mechanical connection<br />
IEC 617 02-12-01<br />
Mechanical operating mechanism<br />
IEC 617 02-13-01<br />
Rotary operating mechanism<br />
IEC 617 02-13-04<br />
Pushbutton control<br />
IEC 617 02-13-05<br />
Equipotential<br />
IEC 617 02-15-05<br />
Galvanicallyseparated<br />
converter<br />
IEC 617 02-17-06/02-17-07<br />
Conductors in shielded<br />
cable<br />
(example: 3 conductors)<br />
IEC 617 03-01-07/03-01-09<br />
Stranded conductors<br />
or cables<br />
(example: 3 conductors)<br />
IEC 617 03-01-08<br />
Conductor connections<br />
IEC 617 03-02-01<br />
M<br />
Terminal or clamp<br />
IEC 617 03-02-02<br />
Socket and plug<br />
(female and male)<br />
IEC 617 03-03-05<br />
Motor<br />
(general symbol)<br />
IEC 617 06-04-01<br />
Current transformer<br />
IEC 617 06-13-11<br />
Winding of three-phase<br />
transformer, connection star<br />
IEC 617 06-10-08<br />
Make contact<br />
IEC 617 07-02-01<br />
Break contact<br />
IEC 617 07-02-03<br />
Change-over break before make<br />
contact<br />
IEC 617 07-02-04<br />
Make position contact<br />
(limit switch)<br />
IEC 617 07-08-01<br />
Break position contact<br />
(limit switch)<br />
IEC 617 07-08-02<br />
Change-over position contact<br />
with momentary interruption<br />
(limit switch)<br />
–<br />
Power <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker-isolator with<br />
automatic opening<br />
IEC 617 07-13-05/07-01-03/07-01-05<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
IEC 617 07-13-08<br />
Control coil<br />
(general symbol)<br />
IEC 617 07-15-01<br />
Instantaneous overcurrent<br />
release<br />
IEC 617 07-16-01<br />
Overcurrent release with<br />
adjustable short time-delay<br />
trip<br />
IEC 617 07-16-01<br />
Overcurrent release with<br />
inverse short time-delay trip<br />
IEC 617 07-16-01<br />
Overcurrent release with inverse<br />
long time-delay trip<br />
IEC 617 07-16-01<br />
Earth fault overcurrent release with<br />
inverse short time-delay trip<br />
IEC 617 07-16-01<br />
Current sensor<br />
IEC 617 09-09-09<br />
119
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams<br />
120<br />
VSEM0077<br />
VSEM0077<br />
Q<br />
Three-pole or four-pole <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker with <strong>SACE</strong> PR111, PR112/P or PR112/PD<br />
mricroprocessor-based release<br />
TI/L1<br />
TI/L2<br />
TI/L3<br />
TI/N<br />
UI/L1<br />
UI/L2<br />
UI/L3<br />
UI/N<br />
N L1 L2 L3<br />
T11<br />
T12<br />
T21<br />
T22<br />
T31<br />
T32<br />
T41<br />
T42<br />
T13<br />
T14<br />
T23<br />
T24<br />
T33<br />
T34<br />
T43<br />
T44<br />
XK1<br />
T11<br />
T12<br />
T21<br />
T22<br />
T31<br />
T32<br />
T41<br />
T42<br />
XK<br />
T13<br />
T14<br />
T23<br />
T24<br />
T33<br />
T34<br />
T43<br />
T44<br />
K51<br />
PR111<br />
PR112/P<br />
PR112/PD<br />
Three-pole or four-pole switch-disconnector<br />
Q<br />
N L1 L2 L3<br />
XO<br />
1 1<br />
XO<br />
2 2<br />
Y01<br />
PE<br />
XK1 XV X<br />
T5 T5 T5 T5<br />
T6 T6 T6 T6<br />
N L1 L2 L3<br />
TI/O<br />
(*G)<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1
Control<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>s<br />
1<br />
Signalling<br />
contacts<br />
VSEM0078<br />
13<br />
21 22<br />
11<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Conn. (X)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
2<br />
3<br />
6<br />
7<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Conn. (X)<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
12<br />
1<br />
Motor for<br />
charging<br />
closing<br />
springs<br />
11<br />
U1<br />
X1 1<br />
M<br />
U1<br />
U1<br />
X1 2<br />
U2<br />
37<br />
S33M/1<br />
U2<br />
U2<br />
37<br />
37<br />
X2 1<br />
X2 2<br />
38<br />
38<br />
38<br />
2 3 4 5<br />
Closing<br />
release<br />
SC<br />
C1<br />
X3 1<br />
C1<br />
C1<br />
X3 2<br />
C2<br />
C2<br />
C2<br />
(*) See note indicated by the letter on page 126<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Conn. (X)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Conn. (X)<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Internal <strong>circuit</strong> Internal <strong>circuit</strong><br />
Segnalling<br />
springs<br />
charged<br />
S33M/2 YU<br />
SC<br />
C1<br />
X3 1<br />
X3 2<br />
C2<br />
13<br />
S43<br />
C1<br />
C1<br />
C2<br />
C2<br />
C3<br />
C3<br />
C3<br />
XK3 28<br />
K51<br />
YC<br />
XK3<br />
26<br />
SO<br />
C11<br />
X4 1<br />
C11<br />
C11<br />
X4 2<br />
C12<br />
21<br />
C12<br />
C12<br />
SO<br />
C11<br />
X4<br />
X4 2<br />
C12<br />
S43<br />
C11<br />
C11<br />
C12<br />
C12<br />
C13<br />
C13<br />
C13<br />
XK3 14<br />
K51<br />
YO<br />
XK3 16<br />
6 (*B) 7<br />
(*B)<br />
D1<br />
D1<br />
D1<br />
1 X5 1<br />
SO SO<br />
YC YC YO YO YU YU<br />
12<br />
(*B)<br />
Signalling under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release<br />
energised<br />
D13<br />
X6 1<br />
X6 2<br />
D14<br />
D13<br />
D13<br />
D14<br />
D14<br />
(*) See note indicated by the letter on page 126<br />
Closing release<br />
with control of<br />
dialogue unit<br />
96<br />
96<br />
96<br />
98<br />
98<br />
98<br />
X7 2 3<br />
S51<br />
X7 1<br />
95<br />
95<br />
95<br />
Opening<br />
release<br />
Signalling <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
open due to<br />
overcurrent release<br />
trip<br />
13<br />
Q/1<br />
14<br />
13<br />
13<br />
14<br />
14<br />
Opening release<br />
with control of<br />
dialogue unit<br />
First set of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
auxiliary<br />
contacts<br />
11<br />
Q/2<br />
12<br />
11<br />
11<br />
12<br />
12<br />
23<br />
Q/3<br />
24<br />
23<br />
23<br />
24<br />
24<br />
21<br />
Q/4<br />
22<br />
21<br />
21<br />
22<br />
22<br />
33<br />
Q/5<br />
Istantaneous<br />
under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release<br />
22<br />
34<br />
33<br />
33<br />
34<br />
34<br />
X5 2<br />
D2<br />
31<br />
Q/6<br />
32<br />
D2<br />
D2<br />
31<br />
31<br />
32<br />
32<br />
43<br />
Q/7<br />
44<br />
Under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release with<br />
electronic timedelay<br />
device<br />
43<br />
43<br />
44<br />
44<br />
41<br />
Q/8<br />
42<br />
41<br />
41<br />
42<br />
42<br />
D1<br />
D1<br />
D1<br />
X5 1<br />
X5 2<br />
53<br />
Q/9<br />
54<br />
D2<br />
Second set of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
auxiliary contacts<br />
(excluded PR112/P, PR112/PD)<br />
D2<br />
D2<br />
53<br />
53<br />
54<br />
54<br />
D<br />
51<br />
Q/10<br />
52<br />
51<br />
51<br />
52<br />
52<br />
121
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams<br />
Signalling<br />
contacts<br />
122<br />
31 32<br />
Protection<br />
unit<br />
VSEM0079<br />
41<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Fixed part<br />
terminal box<br />
Fixed part<br />
terminal box<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
31<br />
First set of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker signalling contacts<br />
(connected, withdrawn, racked-out)<br />
41<br />
104<br />
S75I/1<br />
104<br />
4 2<br />
101<br />
1<br />
101<br />
S75I/2<br />
112<br />
111<br />
4 2<br />
1<br />
112<br />
111<br />
S75E/1<br />
124<br />
(*) See note indicated by the letter on page 126<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Conn. (X)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Conn. (X)<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Fixed part <strong>circuit</strong><br />
Auxiliary <strong>circuit</strong>s of<br />
PR112/P release<br />
Internal <strong>circuit</strong><br />
(*F)<br />
K51<br />
–<br />
+<br />
K1<br />
XK2 8<br />
K1<br />
K1<br />
Uaux.<br />
24V<br />
K2<br />
XK2 9<br />
K2<br />
K2<br />
K3<br />
2 4<br />
121<br />
K3<br />
K3<br />
XK3 22<br />
K51<br />
µP<br />
XK3<br />
K4<br />
K4<br />
K4<br />
(*) See note indicated by the letter on page 126<br />
24<br />
1<br />
124<br />
121<br />
K5<br />
134<br />
S75R/1<br />
K5<br />
K5<br />
XK3 18<br />
K51<br />
pL<br />
XK3<br />
K6<br />
20<br />
K6<br />
K6<br />
2 4<br />
131<br />
1<br />
K7<br />
134<br />
131<br />
142<br />
S75R/2<br />
K7<br />
K7<br />
XK3 2<br />
K51<br />
YO1<br />
XK3<br />
K8<br />
30<br />
K8<br />
K8<br />
142<br />
2 4<br />
141<br />
K9<br />
1<br />
141<br />
K9<br />
K9<br />
XK2 16<br />
XK2<br />
K51<br />
Zin<br />
K11<br />
7<br />
K11<br />
K11<br />
K10<br />
32<br />
K10<br />
K10<br />
XK2 15<br />
K51<br />
Zout<br />
Second set of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker signalling<br />
contacts (connected, withdrawn, racked-out)<br />
154<br />
S75I/3<br />
XK2<br />
W3<br />
154<br />
4 2<br />
151<br />
10<br />
W3<br />
W3<br />
1<br />
151<br />
XK2<br />
W4<br />
S75I/4<br />
19<br />
W4<br />
W4<br />
(A)(B)( )<br />
W2<br />
162<br />
4 2<br />
161<br />
XK2<br />
CC2<br />
162<br />
1<br />
161<br />
S75E/2<br />
174<br />
PR112/P<br />
1<br />
CC2<br />
CC2<br />
2 4<br />
171<br />
174<br />
1<br />
171<br />
S75R3<br />
184<br />
2 4<br />
181<br />
184<br />
1<br />
181<br />
192<br />
S75R/4<br />
192<br />
2 4<br />
191<br />
1<br />
191<br />
(*F)
Dialogue<br />
unit<br />
VSEM0080<br />
42<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Conn. (X)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Term. (XV)<br />
Conn. (X)<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
42<br />
Auxiliary <strong>circuit</strong>s of<br />
PR112/PD release<br />
Internal <strong>circuit</strong><br />
(*F)<br />
K51<br />
–<br />
+<br />
K1<br />
XK2 8<br />
K1<br />
K1<br />
Uaux.<br />
24V<br />
K2<br />
XK2 9<br />
K2<br />
K2<br />
K3<br />
K4<br />
K3<br />
K3<br />
XK3 22<br />
K51<br />
µP<br />
XK3<br />
(*) See note indicated by the letter on page 126<br />
24<br />
K4<br />
K4<br />
K5<br />
K6<br />
K5<br />
K5<br />
XK3 18<br />
K51<br />
pL<br />
XK3<br />
20<br />
K6<br />
K6<br />
K5<br />
K8<br />
K7<br />
K7<br />
XK3 2<br />
K51<br />
Y01<br />
XK3<br />
30<br />
K8<br />
K8<br />
K9<br />
K11<br />
K9<br />
K9<br />
XK2 16<br />
XK2<br />
K51<br />
Zin<br />
7<br />
K11<br />
K11<br />
K10<br />
K10<br />
K10<br />
XK2 15<br />
K51<br />
Zout<br />
K12<br />
XK2 6<br />
XK2<br />
Q<br />
W1<br />
K12<br />
K12<br />
17<br />
W1<br />
W1<br />
(*E)<br />
Q<br />
K13<br />
W2<br />
K13<br />
K13<br />
XK2 13<br />
XK2<br />
5<br />
W2<br />
W2<br />
(A)(B)( )<br />
W1<br />
S75I<br />
K14<br />
CC1<br />
K14<br />
K14<br />
XK2 11<br />
XK2<br />
(*D)<br />
4<br />
S33M<br />
2<br />
CC1<br />
CC1<br />
K15<br />
W3<br />
K15<br />
K15<br />
XK2 12<br />
XK2<br />
10<br />
W3<br />
W3<br />
K16<br />
W4<br />
K16<br />
K16<br />
XK2 14<br />
XK2<br />
19<br />
W4<br />
W4<br />
(A)(B)( )<br />
W2<br />
XK2<br />
CC2<br />
PR112/PD<br />
1<br />
(*D, E, F)<br />
CC2<br />
CC2<br />
123
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> PR111, PR112/P or PR112/PD<br />
release and current transformer on<br />
external neutral conductor<br />
TI/N<br />
UI/N<br />
PE<br />
124<br />
PE<br />
N<br />
L1 L2 L3<br />
TI/O<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
N<br />
Q<br />
TI/L1<br />
TI/L2<br />
TI/L3<br />
UI/L1<br />
UI/L2<br />
UI/L3<br />
L1 L2 L3<br />
(*G)<br />
X XV<br />
TT5<br />
T5 T5<br />
TT6<br />
T6 T6<br />
XK1<br />
T11 T11<br />
T12 T12<br />
T21 T21<br />
T22 T22<br />
T31 T31<br />
T32 T32<br />
XK1<br />
T5<br />
T5<br />
VSEM0081 Three-pole <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker with<br />
(*) See note indicated by the letter on page 126<br />
K51<br />
T13<br />
XK1<br />
T13<br />
T14 T14<br />
T23 T23<br />
T24 T24<br />
T33 T33<br />
T34 T34<br />
PR111<br />
PR112/P<br />
PR112/PD<br />
XO<br />
1<br />
1<br />
XO<br />
2 2<br />
XK1<br />
T41<br />
T42<br />
T44<br />
T43<br />
Y01<br />
T41<br />
T42<br />
T44<br />
T43<br />
51 52<br />
Withdrawable version<br />
of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
T1<br />
T41<br />
T43<br />
T3<br />
T1<br />
T3<br />
T2<br />
T42<br />
T44<br />
T4<br />
T2<br />
T4<br />
104<br />
101<br />
104 112 124 134 142<br />
112<br />
S75I/1 S75I/2 S75E/2 S75R/1 S75R/2<br />
1 1 1 1 1<br />
111<br />
124<br />
121<br />
134<br />
131<br />
142<br />
4 2 4 2 2 4 2 4 2 4<br />
141<br />
101 111 121 131 141<br />
Fixed version<br />
of <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
T1<br />
T41<br />
T43<br />
T3<br />
(*C<br />
T1<br />
T3<br />
T2<br />
T42<br />
T44<br />
T4<br />
T2<br />
T4<br />
External<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Fixed part<br />
terminal box<br />
Fixed part<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Connector<br />
Internal<br />
<strong>circuit</strong><br />
Terminal
Caption<br />
D = Electronic time-delay device for under<strong>voltage</strong><br />
release, outside <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
K51 = PR111, PR112/P or PR112/PD microprocessorbased<br />
overcurrent release with the following<br />
protection functions(see note on page 126)<br />
L overload protection with inverse long timedelay<br />
trip - setting I1<br />
S short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection with inverse or defi<br />
nite short time-delay trip - setting I2<br />
I short-<strong>circuit</strong> protection with instantaneous<br />
time-delay trip - setting I3<br />
G earth-fault protection with inverse short timedelay<br />
trip - setting I4<br />
K51/YC = Closing control from PR112/P and PR112/PD microprocessor-based<br />
release<br />
K51/YO = Opening control from PR112/PD microprocessor-based<br />
release<br />
K51/YO1 = Electrical signalling of alarm due to tripping of release<br />
YO1 (for PR112/P and PR112/PD releases only)<br />
K51/Zin = Zone selectivity: input (with Uaux and PR112/P -<br />
PR112/PD releases only)<br />
K51/Zout = Zone selectivity: output (with Uaux and PR112/P -<br />
PR112/PD releases only)<br />
K51/pL = Electrical signalling of protection function L in prealarm<br />
zone (with Uaux and PR112/P - PR112/PD<br />
releases only)<br />
K51/μP = Electrical signalling of alarm due to microprocessor<br />
operating faults (with Uaux and PR112/P - PR112/PD<br />
releases only)<br />
M = Motor for charging the closing springs<br />
Q = Circuit-breaker<br />
Q/110 = Auxiliary contacts of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
S33M/1 = Limit contact of spring-charging motor<br />
S33M/2 = Contact for electrical signalling of springs charged<br />
S43 = Change-over contact for setting remote/local control<br />
S51 = Contact for electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open<br />
due to tripping of the overcurrent release. The <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
can only be closed after the reset pushbutton<br />
has been pressed<br />
S75I/1…4 = Contacts for electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker in<br />
connected position (for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
only)<br />
S75E/1…4 = Contacts for electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker in<br />
withdrawn position (for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
only)<br />
S75R/1…4 = Contacts for electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker in<br />
racked-out position (for withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong><br />
only)<br />
SC = Pushbutton or contact for closing the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
SO = Pushbutton or contact for opening the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
TI/L1 = Current transformer located on phase L1<br />
TI/L2 = Current transformer located on phase L2<br />
TI/L3 = Current transformer located on phase L3<br />
TI/N = Current transformer located on neutral<br />
TI/O = Homopolar current transformer, located on the<br />
conductor connecting the star centre of the MV/LV<br />
tranformer to earth (see note G)<br />
UI/L1 = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase<br />
L1<br />
UI/L2 = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase<br />
L2<br />
UI/L3 = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase<br />
L3<br />
UI/N = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on neutral<br />
Uaux. = Auxiliary power supply (see note F)<br />
W1 = Serial interface with the control system (external<br />
bus): EIA RS485 interface (see note E)<br />
W2 = Serial interface with the accessories of the PR112/<br />
P and PR112/PD release (internal bus)<br />
X = Delivery connector for auxiliary <strong>circuit</strong>s of withdrawable<br />
version <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
X1...X7 = Connectors for <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker applications<br />
XF = Delivery terminal board for the position contact of the<br />
withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker (applied to the fixed part<br />
of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker)<br />
XK1 = Connector for the power <strong>circuit</strong>s of PR111, PR112/<br />
P and PR112/PD releases<br />
XK2, XK3 = Connector for the auxiliary <strong>circuit</strong>s of PR112/P and<br />
PR112/PD releases<br />
XO = Connector for release YO1<br />
XV = Delivery terminal board for auxiliary <strong>circuit</strong>s of fixed<br />
version <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
YC = Shunt closing release<br />
YO = Shunt opening release<br />
YO1 = Overcurrent shunt opening release<br />
YU = Under<strong>voltage</strong> release (see note B)<br />
125
Electrical <strong>circuit</strong> diagrams<br />
126<br />
Incompatibility<br />
The <strong>circuit</strong>s shown in the following figures cannot be provided on the same <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker at<br />
the same time: (2 - 3)<br />
(4 - 5)<br />
(6 - 7)<br />
(22 - 41 - 42)<br />
(31 - 51)<br />
(51 - 52)<br />
Notes<br />
Notes<br />
A) The <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. order<br />
acknowledgement.<br />
B) The under<strong>voltage</strong> release is supplied for operation using a power supply branched on the<br />
supply side of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker or from an independent source. The <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker can<br />
only close when the release is energised (there is a mechanical lock on closing).<br />
If the same power supply is used for the closing and under<strong>voltage</strong> releases and one wants<br />
automatic closing of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker on return of the auxiliary power supply, it is necessary<br />
to insert a 30 millisecond delay between the under<strong>voltage</strong> release accept signal and<br />
energisation of the closing release. This can be obtained using a <strong>circuit</strong> outside the <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
which comprises a permanently closed contact, the contact indicated in figure (12)<br />
and a time-delay relay.<br />
C) For fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> with current transformers on the neutral conductors outside the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, the terminals of transformer TI/N must be short-<strong>circuit</strong>ed when one wants<br />
to remove the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
D) Connect contact S33M/2 shown in Fig. (11), one of the make contacts and one of the break<br />
contacts of the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker shown in Fig. (21) and one of the S75I contacts shown in Fig.<br />
(31) or (51) as shown in Fig. (42).<br />
On fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong>, connect terminal XV-K14 directly to terminal XV-K16 (contact S75I<br />
does not exist).<br />
E) See the following documents on how to connect the EIA RS485 serial line:<br />
– examples of EIA RS485 serial communication distribution = 401517<br />
– prescriptions for laying EIA RS485 serial communication cable = 601823.<br />
F) Auxiliary <strong>voltage</strong> Uaux. is necessary to guarantee that the following functions of <strong>SACE</strong><br />
PR112/P releases will operate correctly even without self-supply (primary currents lower<br />
than 0.28 In):<br />
– current measurement<br />
– protection against earth fault and relative signals<br />
– K51/µp and K51/pL signals<br />
The auxiliary <strong>voltage</strong> Uaux. is always necessary to guarantee correct operation of the dialogue<br />
unit (for <strong>SACE</strong> PR112/PD release only).<br />
The presence of a primary current > 0.28 In on at least one phase fitted with current transformer<br />
guarantees the correct operation of all protection and measurement functions.<br />
G) Earth fault protection is available with the PR112/P and PR112/PD release by means of a<br />
current transformer located on the conductor connecting the star centre of the MV/LV transformer.<br />
The connection between terminals 1 and 2 of the TI/O current transformer and poles<br />
T5 and T6 of connector X must be made with a two-pole shielded and corded ABB <strong>SACE</strong><br />
L.V. type T54602 cable with a length not exceeding 5 m. The shield must be earthed on the<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker side.
INDEX<br />
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1 Circuit-breaker 128<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2 Circuit-breaker 131<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3 Circuit-breaker 136<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4 Circuit-breaker 144<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6 Circuit-breaker 145<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1/MS Switch-disconnector 150<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2/MS Switch-disconnector 152<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3/MS Switch-disconnector 155<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4/MS Switch-disconnector 158<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6/MS Switch-disconnector 160<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> CS Isolating truck 162<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> MTP Earthing switch 163<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> MT Earthing truck 164<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> PF Fixed parts 165<br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories 167<br />
Microprocessor-based releases<br />
and current transformer 172<br />
Conversion kit for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker or<br />
fixed parts 173<br />
127
128
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E1B 08 I u (40 °C) = 800A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1B 08 F HR I n 800 A LI 37527 39000<br />
LSI 37861 39003 LSI 38195 39009 LSI 38199 39015<br />
LSIG 38192 39006 LSIG 38198 39012 LSIG 38205 39018<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1B 08 F VR I n 800 A LI 38372 39022<br />
LSI 38375 39025 LSI 38381 39031 LSI 38387 39037<br />
LSIG 38378 39027 LSIG 38384 39034 LSIG 38390 39040<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1B 08 F F I n 800 A LI 38394 39044<br />
LSI 38397 39047 LSI 38403 39053 LSI 38409 39059<br />
LSIG 38400 39050 LSIG 38406 39056 LSIG 38412 39062<br />
F = FIXED → E1B 1 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1B 12 F HR I n 1250 A LI 39092 39205<br />
LSI 39093 39208 LSI 39101 39217 LSI 39109 39225<br />
LSIG 39097 39213 LSIG 39105 39221 LSIG 39113 39229<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1B 12 F VR I n 1250 A LI 39118 39234<br />
LSI 39122 39238 LSI 39130 39246 LSI 39138 39254<br />
LSIG 39126 39242 LSIG 39134 39250 LSIG 39142 39258<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1B 12 F F I n 1250 A LI 39147 39263<br />
LSI 39151 39267 LSI 39159 39275 LSI 39167 39283<br />
LSIG 39155 39271 LSIG 39163 39279 LSIG 39171 39287<br />
129
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E1B 08 I u (40 °C) = 800A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1B 08 W MP I n 800 A LI 38978 39066<br />
LSI 38981 39069 LSI 38987 39075 LSI 38993 39081<br />
LSIG 38984 39072 LSIG 38990 39078 LSIG 38996 39084<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E1B 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1B 12 W MP I n 1250 A LI 39176 39292<br />
LSI 39180 39296 LSI 39188 39304 LSI 39196 39312<br />
LSIG 39184 39300 LSIG 39192 39308 LSIG 39200 39316<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
130<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 W FP HR 37821 37826<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1 W FP VR 37872 37877<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1 W FP F 37922 37927<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E1 W FP FL 37972 37977
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E2N 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N 12 F HR I n 1250 A LI 39673 39788<br />
LSI 39677 39792 LSI 39685 39800 LSI 39693 39813<br />
LSIG 39681 39796 LSIG 39689 39803 LSIG 39697 39809<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N 12 F VR I n 1250 A LI 39702 39817<br />
LSI 39706 39821 LSI 39714 39829 LSI 39722 39837<br />
LSIG 39710 39824 LSIG 39718 39833 LSIG 39726 39841<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2N 12 F F I n 1250 A LI 39730 39846<br />
LSI 39734 39850 LSI 39742 39858 LSI 39750 39866<br />
LSIG 39738 39854 LSIG 39746 39862 LSIG 39754 39870<br />
F = FIXED → E2L 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2L 12 F HR I n 1250 A LI 43390 40337<br />
LSI 43394 40341 LSI 43402 40349 LSI 43410 40357<br />
LSIG 43398 40345 LSIG 43406 40353 LSIG 43414 40361<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2L 12 F VR I n 1250 A LI 40234 40366<br />
LSI 40238 40370 LSI 40246 40378 LSI 40254 40386<br />
LSIG 40242 40374 LSIG 40250 40382 LSIG 40258 40390<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2L 12 F F I n 1250 A LI 40263 40395<br />
LSI 40266 40399 LSI 40275 40407 LSI 40283 40415<br />
LSIG 40271 40403 LSIG 40279 40411 LSIG 40287 40419<br />
F = FIXED → E2B 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2B 16 F HR I n 1600 A LI 39320 39408<br />
LSI 39323 39411 LSI 39329 39417 LSI 39335 39423<br />
LSIG 39326 39414 LSIG 39332 39420 LSIG 39338 39426<br />
VR = TerminaliVR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2B 16 F VR I n 1600 A LI 39342 39430<br />
LSI 39345 39433 LSI 39351 39439 LSI 39357 39445<br />
LSIG 39348 39436 LSIG 39354 39442 LSIG 39360 39448<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2B 16 F F I n 1600 A LI 39364 39452<br />
LSI 39367 39455 LSI 39373 39461 LSI 39379 39467<br />
LSIG 39370 39458 LSIG 39376 39464 LSIG 39382 39470<br />
131
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E2N 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N 16 F HR I n 1600 A LI 39903 39991<br />
LSI 39906 39994 LSI 39912 40000 LSI 39918 40006<br />
LSIG 39909 39997 LSIG 39915 40003 LSIG 39921 40009<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N 16 F VR I n 1600 A LI 39925 40013<br />
LSI 39928 40016 LSI 39934 40022 LSI 39940 40028<br />
LSIG 39931 40019 LSIG 39937 40025 LSIG 39943 40031<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2N 16 F F I n 1600 A LI 39947 40035<br />
LSI 39950 40038 LSI 39956 40044 LSI 39962 40050<br />
LSIG 39953 40041 LSIG 39959 40047 LSIG 39965 40053<br />
F = FIXED → E2L 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2L 16 F HR I n 1600 A LI 40452 40540<br />
LSI 40455 40543 LSI 40461 40549 LSI 40467 40555<br />
LSIG 40458 40546 LSIG 40464 40552 LSIG 40470 40558<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2L 16 F VR I n 1600 A LI 40474 40562<br />
LSI 40477 40565 LSI 40483 40571 LSI 40489 40577<br />
LSIG 40480 40568 LSIG 40486 40574 LSIG 40492 40580<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2L 16 F F I n 1600 A LI 40496 40584<br />
LSI 40499 40587 LSI 40505 40593 LSI 40511 40599<br />
LSIG 40502 40590 LSIG 40508 40596 LSIG 40514 40602<br />
F = FIXED → E2B 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2B 20 F HR I n 2000 A LI 39496 39584<br />
LSI 39499 39587 LSI 39505 39593 LSI 39511 39599<br />
LSIG 39502 39590 LSIG 39508 39596 LSIG 39514 39601<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2B 20 F VR I n 2000 A LI 39518 39606<br />
LSI 39521 39609 LSI 39527 39615 LSI 39533 39621<br />
LSIG 39524 39612 LSIG 39530 39618 LSIG 39536 39624<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2B 20 F F I n 2000 A LI 39540 39628<br />
LSI 39543 39631 LSI 39549 39637 LSI 39555 39643<br />
LSIG 39546 39634 LSIG 39552 39640 LSIG 39558 39646<br />
132
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E2N 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N 20 F HR I n 2000 A LI 40079 40167<br />
LSI 40082 40170 LSI 40088 40176 LSI 40094 40182<br />
LSIG 40085 40173 LSIG 40091 40179 LSIG 40097 40185<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N 20 F VR I n 2000 A LI 40101 43352<br />
LSI 40105 43355 LSI 40110 43361 LSI 40116 43367<br />
LSIG 40107 43358 LSIG 40113 43364 LSIG 40119 43370<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2N 20 F F I n 2000 A LI 40123 40189<br />
LSI 40126 40192 LSI 40132 40198 LSI 40138 40204<br />
LSIG 40129 40195 LSIG 40135 40201 LSIG 40141 40207<br />
133
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2N 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N 12 W MP I n 1250 A LI 39759 39875<br />
LSI 39763 39879 LSI 39771 39887 LSI 39779 39895<br />
LSIG 39767 39883 LSIG 39775 39891 LSIG 39783 39899<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2L 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2L 12 W MP I n 1250 A LI 40292 40424<br />
LSI 40296 40428 LSI 40304 40436 LSI 40312 40444<br />
LSIG 40300 40432 LSIG 40308 40440 LSIG 40316 40448<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2B 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2B 16 W MP I n 1600 A LI 39386 39474<br />
LSI 39389 39477 LSI 39395 39483 LSI 39401 39489<br />
LSIG 39392 39480 LSIG 39398 39486 LSIG 39404 39492<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2N 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N 16 W MP I n 1600 A LI 39969 40057<br />
LSI 39972 40060 LSI 39978 40066 LSI 39984 40072<br />
LSIG 39975 40064 LSIG 39981 40069 LSIG 39987 40075<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2L 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2L 16 W MP I n 1600 A LI 40518 40606<br />
LSI 40521 40609 LSI 40527 40615 LSI 40533 40621<br />
LSIG 40524 40612 LSIG 40530 40618 LSIG 40536 40624<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2B 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 40kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2B 20 W MP I n 2000 A LI 39562 39650<br />
LSI 39565 39653 LSI 39571 39659 LSI 39577 39665<br />
LSIG 39568 39656 LSIG 39574 39662 LSIG 39580 39668<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2N 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N 20 W MP I n 2000 A LI 40145 40211<br />
LSI 40148 40214 LSI 40154 40220 LSI 40160 40226<br />
LSIG 40151 40217 LSIG 40157 40223 LSIG 40163 40229<br />
134
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2 W FP HR 37822 37827<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2 W FP VR 37873 37886<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2 W FP F 37923 37928<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E2 W FP FL 37973 37978<br />
135
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E3S 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 12 F HR I n 1250 A LI 40889 40949<br />
LSI 40891 40951 LSI 40895 40955 LSI 40899 40959<br />
LSIG 40893 40953 LSIG 40897 40957 LSIG 40901 40961<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 12 F VR I n 1250 A LI 40904 40964<br />
LSI 40906 40966 LSI 40910 40970 LSI 40914 40974<br />
LSIG 40908 40968 LSIG 40912 40972 LSIG 40916 40976<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S 12 F F I n 1250 A LI 40919 40979<br />
LSI 40921 40981 LSI 40925 40985 LSI 40929 40989<br />
LSIG 40923 40983 LSIG 40927 40987 LSIG 40931 40991<br />
F = FIXED → E3H 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 12 F HR I n 1250 A LI 41489 41549<br />
LSI 41491 41551 LSI 41495 41555 LSI 41499 41559<br />
LSIG 41493 41553 LSIG 41497 41557 LSIG 41501 41561<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 12 F VR I n 1250 A LI 41504 41564<br />
LSI 41506 41566 LSI 41510 41570 LSI 41514 41574<br />
LSIG 41508 41568 LSIG 41512 41572 LSIG 41516 41576<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3H 12 F F I n 1250 A LI 41519 41579<br />
LSI 41521 41581 LSI 41525 41585 LSI 41529 41589<br />
LSIG 41523 41583 LSIG 41527 41587 LSIG 41531 41591<br />
F = FIXED → E3S 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 16 F HR I n 1600 A LI 41009 41069<br />
LSI 41011 41071 LSI 41015 41075 LSI 41019 41079<br />
LSIG 41013 41073 LSIG 41017 41077 LSIG 41021 41081<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 16 F VR I n 1600 A LI 41024 41084<br />
LSI 41026 41086 LSI 41030 41090 LSI 41034 41094<br />
LSIG 41028 41088 LSIG 41032 41092 LSIG 41036 41096<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S 16 F F I n 1600 A LI 41039 41099<br />
LSI 41041 41101 LSI 41045 41105 LSI 41049 41109<br />
LSIG 41043 41103 LSIG 41047 41107 LSIG 41051 41111<br />
136
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E3H 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 16 F HR I n 1600 A LI 41609 41669<br />
LSI 41611 41671 LSI 41615 41675 LSI 41619 41679<br />
LSIG 41613 41673 LSIG 41617 41677 LSIG 41621 41681<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 16 F VR I n 1600 A LI 41624 41684<br />
LSI 41626 41686 LSI 41630 41690 LSI 41634 41694<br />
LSIG 41628 41688 LSIG 41632 41692 LSIG 41636 41696<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3H 16 F F I n 1600 A LI 41639 41699<br />
LSI 41641 41701 LSI 41645 41705 LSI 41649 41709<br />
LSIG 41643 41703 LSIG 41647 41707 LSIG 41651 41711<br />
F = FIXED → E3S 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 20 F HR I n 2000 A LI 41129 41189<br />
LSI 41131 41191 LSI 41135 41195 LSI 41139 41199<br />
LSIG 41133 41193 LSIG 41137 41197 LSIG 41141 41201<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 20 F VR I n 2000 A LI 41144 41204<br />
LSI 41146 41206 LSI 41150 41210 LSI 41154 41214<br />
LSIG 41148 41208 LSIG 41152 41212 LSIG 41156 41216<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S 20 F F I n 2000 A LI 41159 41219<br />
LSI 41161 41221 LSI 41165 41225 LSI 41169 41229<br />
LSIG 41163 41223 LSIG 41167 41227 LSIG 41171 41231<br />
F = FIXED → E3H 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 20 F HR I n 2000 A LI 41729 41789<br />
LSI 41731 41791 LSI 41735 41795 LSI 41739 41799<br />
LSIG 41733 41793 LSIG 41737 41797 LSIG 41741 41801<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 20 F VR I n 2000 A LI 41744 41804<br />
LSI 41746 41806 LSI 41750 41810 LSI 41754 41814<br />
LSIG 41748 41808 LSIG 41752 41812 LSIG 41756 41816<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3H 20 F F I n 2000 A LI 41759 41819<br />
LSI 41761 41821 LSI 41765 41825 LSI 41769 41829<br />
LSIG 41763 41823 LSIG 41767 41827 LSIG 41771 41831<br />
137
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E3L 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3L 20 F HR I n 2000 A LI 42089 42149<br />
LSI 42091 42151 LSI 42095 42155 LSI 42099 42159<br />
LSIG 42093 42153 LSIG 42097 42157 LSIG 42101 42161<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3L 20 F VR I n 2000 A LI 42104 42164<br />
LSI 42106 42166 LSI 42110 42170 LSI 42114 42174<br />
LSIG 42108 42168 LSIG 42112 42172 LSIG 42116 42176<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3L 20 F F I n 2000 A LI 42119 42179<br />
LSI 42121 42181 LSI 42125 42185 LSI 42129 42189<br />
LSIG 42123 42183 LSIG 42127 42187 LSIG 42131 42191<br />
F = FIXED → E3N 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3N 25 F HR I n 2500 A LI 40649 40709<br />
LSI 40651 40711 LSI 40655 40715 LSI 40659 40719<br />
LSIG 41653 41713 LSIG 40657 40717 LSIG 40661 40721<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3N 25 F VR I n 2500 A LI 40664 40724<br />
LSI 40666 40726 LSI 40670 40730 LSI 40674 40734<br />
LSIG 40668 40728 LSIG 40672 40732 LSIG 40676 40736<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3N 25 F F I n 2500 A LI 40679 40739<br />
LSI 40681 40741 LSI 40685 40745 LSI 40689 40749<br />
LSIG 40683 40743 LSIG 40687 40747 LSIG 40691 40751<br />
F = FIXED → E3S 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 25 F HR I n 2500 A LI 41249 41309<br />
LSI 41251 41311 LSI 41255 41315 LSI 41259 41319<br />
LSIG 41253 41313 LSIG 41257 41317 LSIG 41261 41321<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 25 F VR I n 2500 A LI 41264 41324<br />
LSI 41266 41326 LSI 41270 41330 LSI 41274 41334<br />
LSIG 41268 41328 LSIG 41272 41332 LSIG 41276 41336<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S 25 F F I n 2500 A LI 41279 41339<br />
LSI 41281 41341 LSI 41285 41345 LSI 41289 41349<br />
LSIG 41283 41343 LSIG 41287 41347 LSIG 41291 41351<br />
138
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E3H 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 25 F HR I n 2500 A LI 41849 41909<br />
LSI 41851 41911 LSI 41855 41915 LSI 41859 41919<br />
LSIG 41853 41913 LSIG 41857 41917 LSIG 41861 41921<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 25 F VR I n 2500 A LI 41864 41924<br />
LSI 41866 41926 LSI 41870 41930 LSI 41874 41934<br />
LSIG 41868 41928 LSIG 41872 41932 LSIG 41876 41936<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3H 25 F F I n 2500 A LI 41879 41939<br />
LSI 41881 41941 LSI 41885 41945 LSI 41889 41949<br />
LSIG 41883 41943 LSIG 41887 41947 LSIG 41891 41951<br />
F = FIXED → E3L 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3L 25 F HR I n 2500 A LI 42209 42269<br />
LSI 42211 42271 LSI 42215 42275 LSI 42219 42279<br />
LSIG 42213 42273 LSIG 42217 42277 LSIG 42221 42281<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3L 25 F VR I n 2500 A LI 42224 42284<br />
LSI 42226 42286 LSI 42230 42290 LSI 42234 42294<br />
LSIG 42228 42288 LSIG 42232 42292 LSIG 42236 42296<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3L 25 F F I n 2500 A LI 42239 42299<br />
LSI 42241 42301 LSI 42245 42305 LSI 42249 42309<br />
LSIG 42243 42303 LSIG 42247 42307 LSIG 42251 42311<br />
F = FIXED → E3N 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3N 32 F HR I n 3200 A LI 40784 43373<br />
LSI 40786 43375 LSI 40790 43379 LSI 40794 43383<br />
LSIG 40788 43377 LSIG 40792 43381 LSIG 40796 43385<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3N 32 F VR I n 3200 A LI 40799 40844<br />
LSI 40801 40846 LSI 40805 40850 LSI 40809 40854<br />
LSIG 40803 40848 LSIG 40807 40852 LSIG 40811 40856<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3N 32 F F I n 3200 A LI 40814 40859<br />
LSI 40816 40861 LSI 40820 40865 LSI 40824 40869<br />
LSIG 40818 40863 LSIG 40822 40867 LSIG 40826 40871<br />
139
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E3S 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 32 F HR I n 3200 A LI 41369 41429<br />
LSI 41371 41431 LSI 41375 41435 LSIG 41379 41439<br />
LSIG 41373 41933 LSIG 41377 41437 LSIG 41381 41441<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S 32 F VR I n 3200 A LI 41384 41444<br />
LSI 41386 41446 LSI 41390 41450 LSI 41394 41454<br />
LSIG 41388 41448 LSIG 41392 41452 LSIG 41396 41456<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S 32 F F I n 3200 A LI 41399 41459<br />
LSI 41401 41461 LSI 41405 41465 LSI 41409 41469<br />
LSIG 41403 41463 LSIG 41407 41467 LSIG 41411 41471<br />
F = FIXED → E3H 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 32 F HR I n 3200 A LI 41969 42029<br />
LSI 41971 42031 LSI 41975 42035 LSI 41979 42039<br />
LSIG 41973 42033 LSIG 41977 42037 LSIG 41981 42041<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3H 32 F VR I n 3200 A LI 41984 42044<br />
LSI 41986 42046 LSI 41990 42050 LSI 41994 42054<br />
LSIG 41988 42048 LSIG 41992 42052 LSIG 41996 42056<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3H 32 F F I n 3200 A LI 41999 42059<br />
LSI 42001 42061 LSI 42005 42065 LSI 42009 42069<br />
LSIG 42003 42063 LSIG 42007 42067 LSIG 42011 42071<br />
140
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S 12 W MP I n 1250 A LI 40934 40994<br />
LSI 40936 40996 LSI 40940 41000 LSI 40944 41004<br />
LSIG 40938 40998 LSIG 40942 41002 LSIG 40946 41006<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3H 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3H 12 W MP I n 1250 A LI 41534 41594<br />
LSI 41536 41596 LSI 41540 41600 LSI 41544 41604<br />
LSIG 41538 41598 LSIG 41542 41602 LSIG 41546 41606<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S 16 W MP I n 1600 A LI 41054 41114<br />
LSI 41056 41116 LSI 41060 41120 LSI 41064 41124<br />
LSIG 41058 41118 LSIG 41062 41122 LSIG 41066 41126<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3H 16 Iu (40 °C) = 1600A Icu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based<br />
release<br />
PR111<br />
P<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
PR112<br />
P<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
PR112<br />
PD<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3H 16 W MP I n 1600 A LI 41654 41714<br />
LSI 41656 41716 LSI 41660 41720 LSI 41664 41724<br />
LSIG 41658 41718 LSIG 41662 41722 LSIG 41666 41726<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S 20 W MP I n 2000 A LI 41174 41234<br />
LSI 41176 41236 LSI 41180 41240 LSI 41184 41244<br />
LSIG 41178 41238 LSIG 41182 41242 LSIG 41186 41246<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3H 20 → I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3H 20 W MP I n 2000 A LI 41774 41834<br />
LSI 41776 41836 LSI 41780 41840 LSI 41784 41844<br />
LSIG 41778 41838 LSI 41782 41842 LSIG 41786 41846<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3L 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3L 20 W MP I n 2000 A LI 42134 42194<br />
LSI 42136 42196 LSI 42140 42200 LSI 42144 42204<br />
LSIG 42138 42198 LSIG 42142 42202 LSIG 42146 42206<br />
141
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3N 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3N 25 W MP I n 2500 A LI 40694 40754<br />
LSI 40696 40756 LSI 40700 40760 LSI 40704 40764<br />
LSIG 40698 40758 LSIG 40702 40762 LSIG 40706 40766<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S 12 W MP I n 2500 A LI 41294 41354<br />
LSI 41296 41356 LSI 41300 41360 LSI 41304 41364<br />
LSIG 41298 41358 LSIG 41302 41362 LSIG 41306 41366<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3H 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3H 25 W MP I n 2500 A LI 41894 41954<br />
LSI 41896 41956 LSI 41900 41960 LSI 41904 41964<br />
LSIG 41898 41958 LSIG 41902 41962 LSIG 41906 41966<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3L 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cu (415 V) = 130kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3L 25 W MP I n 2500 A LI 42254 42314<br />
LSI 42256 42316 LSI 42260 42320 LSI 42264 42324<br />
LSIG 42258 42318 LSIG 42262 42322 LSIG 42266 42326<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3N 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 65kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3N 32 W MP I n 3200 A LI 40829 40874<br />
LSI 40831 40876 LSI 40835 40880 LSI 40839 40884<br />
LSIG 40833 40878 LSIG 40837 40882 LSIG 40841 40886<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S 32 W MP I n 3200 A LI 41414 41474<br />
LSI 41416 41476 LSI 41420 41480 LSI 41424 41484<br />
LSIG 41418 41478 LSIG 41422 41482 LSIG 41426 41486<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3H 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3H 32 W MP I n 3200 A LI 42014 42074<br />
LSI 42016 42076 LSI 42020 42080 LSI 42024 42084<br />
LSIG 42018 42078 LSIG 42022 42082 LSIG 42026 42086<br />
142
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3 W FP HR 37823 37828<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3 W FP VR 37874 37878<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3 W FP F 37924 37929<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E3 W FP FL 37974 37979<br />
143
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E4H 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4H 32 F HR I n 3200 A LI 42450 43417<br />
LSI 42452 43419 LSI 42456 43423 LSI 42460 43427<br />
LSIG 42454 43421 LSIG 42458 43425 LSIG 42462 43429<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4H 32 F VR I n 3200 A LI 42465 42510<br />
LSI 42467 42512 LSI 42471 42516 LSI 42475 42520<br />
LSIG 42469 42514 LSIG 42473 42518 LSIG 42477 42522<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4H 32 F F I n 3200 A LI 42480 42525<br />
LSI 42482 42527 LSI 42486 42531 LSI 42490 42535<br />
LSIG 42484 42529 LSIG 42488 42533 LSIG 42492 42537<br />
F = FIXED → E4S 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4S 40 F HR I n 4000 A LI 42330 42390<br />
LSI 42332 42392 LSI 42336 42396 LSI 42340 42400<br />
LSIG 42334 42394 LSIG 42338 42398 LSIG 42342 42402<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4S 40 F VR I n 4000 A LI 42345 42405<br />
LSI 42347 42407 LSI 42351 42411 LSI 42355 42415<br />
LSIG 42349 42409 LSIG 42353 42413 LSIG 42357 42417<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4S 40 F F I n 4000 A LI 42360 42420<br />
LSI 42362 42422 LSI 42366 42426 LSI 42370 42430<br />
LSIG 42364 42424 LSIG 42368 42428 LSIG 42372 42432<br />
F = FIXED → E4H 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4H 40 F HR I n 4000 A LI 42555 42615<br />
LSI 42557 42617 LSI 42561 42621 LSI 42565 42625<br />
LSIG 42559 42619 LSIG 42563 42623 LSIG 42567 42627<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4H 40 F VR I n 4000 A LI 42570 42630<br />
LSI 42572 42632 LSI 42576 42636 LSI 42580 42640<br />
LSIG 42574 42634 LSIG 42578 42638 LSIG 42582 42642<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4H 40 F F I n 4000 A LI 42585 42645<br />
LSI 42587 42647 LSI 42591 42651 LSI 42595 42655<br />
LSIG 42589 42649 LSIG 42593 42653 LSIG 42597 42657<br />
144
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E4H 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4H 32 W MP I n 3200 A LI 42495 42540<br />
LSI 42497 42542 LSI 42501 42546 LSI 42505 42550<br />
LSIG 42499 42544 LSIG 42503 42548 LSIG 42507 42552<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E4S 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cu (415 V) = 75kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4S 40 W MP I n 4000 A LI 42375 42435<br />
LSI 42377 42437 LSI 42381 42441 LSI 42385 42445<br />
LSIG 42379 42439 LSIG 42383 42443 LSIG 42387 42447<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E4H 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4H 40 W MP I n 4000 A LI 42600 42660<br />
LSI 42602 42662 LSI 42606 42666 LSI 42610 42670<br />
LSIG 42604 42664 LSIG 42608 42668 LSIG 42612 42672<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4 W FP HR 37824 37829<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4 W FP VR 37875 37879<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4 W FP F 37925 37930<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E4 W FP FL 37975 37980<br />
145
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E6V 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 32 F HR I n 3200 A LI 42914 42946<br />
LSI 42915 42947 LSI 42917 42949 LSI 42919 42951<br />
LSIG 42916 42948 LSIG 42918 42950 LSIG 42920 42952<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 32 F VR I n 3200 A LI 42922 42954<br />
LSI 42923 42955 LSI 42925 42957 LSI 42927 42959<br />
LSIG 42924 42956 LSIG 42926 42958 LSIG 42928 42960<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6V 32 F F I n 3200 A LI 42930 42962<br />
LSI 42931 42963 LSI 42933 42965 LSI 42935 42967<br />
LSIG 42932 42964 LSIG 42934 42966 LSIG 42936 42968<br />
F = FIXED → E6V 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 40 F HR I n 4000 A LI 42979 43039<br />
LSI 42981 43041 LSI 42985 43045 LSI 42989 43049<br />
LSIG 42983 43043 LSIG 42987 43047 LSIG 42991 43051<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 40 F VR I n 4000 A LI 42994 43054<br />
LSI 42996 43056 LSI 43000 43060 LSI 43004 43064<br />
LSIG 42998 43058 LSIG 43002 43062 LSIG 43006 43066<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6V 40 F F I n 4000 A LI 43009 43069<br />
LSI 43011 43071 LSI 43015 43075 LSI 43019 43079<br />
LSIG 43013 43073 LSIG 43017 43077 LSIG 43021 43081<br />
F = FIXED → E6H 50 I u (40 °C) = 5000A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6H 50 F HR I n 5000 A LI 42675 42735<br />
LSI 42677 42737 LSI 42681 42741 LSI 42685 42745<br />
LSIG 42679 42739 LSIG 42683 42743 LSIG 42687 42747<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6H 50 F VR I n 5000 A LI 42690 42750<br />
LSI 42692 42752 LSI 42696 42756 LSI 42700 42760<br />
LSIG 42694 42754 LSIG 42698 42758 LSIG 42702 42762<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6H 50 F F I n 5000 A LI 42705 42765<br />
LSI 42707 42767 LSI 42711 42771 LSI 42715 42775<br />
LSIG 42709 42769 LSIG 42713 42773 LSIG 42717 42777<br />
146
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
F = FIXED → E6V 50 I u (40 °C) = 5000A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 50 F HR I n 5000 A LI 43099 43159<br />
LSI 43101 43161 LSI 43105 43165 LSI 43109 43169<br />
LSIG 43103 43163 LSIG 43107 43167 LSIG 43111 43171<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 50 F VR I n 5000 A LI 43114 43174<br />
LSI 43116 43176 LSI 43120 43180 LSI 43124 43184<br />
LSIG 43118 43178 LSIG 43122 43182 LSIG 43126 43186<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6V 50 F F I n 5000 A LI 43129 43189<br />
LSI 43131 43191 LSI 43135 43195 LSI 43139 43199<br />
LSIG 43133 43193 LSIG 43137 43197 LSIG 43141 43201<br />
F = FIXED → E6H 63 I u (40 °C) = 6300A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6H 63 F HR I n 6300 A LI 42795 42855<br />
LSI 42797 42857 LSI 42801 42861 LSI 42805 42865<br />
LSIG 42799 42859 LSIG 42803 42863 LSIG 42807 42867<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6H 63 F VR I n 6300 A LI 42810 42870<br />
LSI 42812 42872 LSI 42816 42876 LSI 42820 42880<br />
LSIG 42814 42874 LSIG 42818 42878 LSIG 42822 42882<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6H 63 F F I n 6300 A LI 42825 42885<br />
LSI 42827 42887 LSI 42831 42891 LSI 42835 42895<br />
LSIG 42829 42889 LSIG 42833 42893 LSIG 42837 42897<br />
F = FIXED → E6V 63 I u (40 °C) = 6300A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 63 F HR I n 6300 A LI 43219 43279<br />
LSI 43221 43281 LSI 43225 43285 LSI 43229 43289<br />
LSIG 43223 43283 LSIG 43227 43287 LSIG 43231 43291<br />
VR = VerticaL<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6V 63 F VR I n 6300 A LI 43234 43294<br />
LSI 43236 43296 LSI 43240 43300 LSI 43244 43304<br />
LSIG 43238 43298 LSIG 43242 43302 LSIG 43246 43306<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6V 63 F F I n 6300 A LI 43249 43432<br />
LSI 43251 43434 LSI 43255 43438 LSI 43259 43442<br />
LSIG 43253 43436 LSIG 43257 43440 LSIG 43261 43444<br />
147
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6V 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6V 32 W MP I n 3200 A LI 42938 42970<br />
LSI 42939 42971 LSI 42941 42973 LSI 42943 42975<br />
LSIG 42940 42972 LSIG 42942 42974 LSIG 42944 42976<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6V 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6V 40 W MP I n 4000 A LI 43024 43084<br />
LSI 43026 43086 LSI 43030 43090 LSI 43034 43094<br />
LSIG 43028 43088 LSIG 43032 43092 LSIG 43036 43096<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6H 50 I u (40 °C) = 5000A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6H 50 W MP I n 5000 A LI 42720 42780<br />
LSI 42722 42782 LSI 42726 42786 LSI 42730 42790<br />
LSIG 42724 42784 LSIG 42728 42788 LSIG 42732 42792<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6V 50 I u (40 °C) = 5000A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6V 50 W MP I n 5000 A LI 43144 43204<br />
LSI 43146 43206 LSI 43150 43210 LSI 43154 43214<br />
LSIG 43148 43208 LSIG 43152 43212 LSIG 43156 43216<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6H 63 I u (40 °C) = 6300A I cu (415 V) = 100kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P 3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6H 63 W MP I n 6300 A LI 42840 42900<br />
LSI 42842 42902 LSI 42846 42906 LSI 42850 42910<br />
LSIG 42844 42904 LSIG 42848 42908 LSIG 42852 42912<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6V 63 I u (40 °C) = 6300A I cu (415 V) = 150kA<br />
Microprocessor-based PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
release P 3 poles 4 poles P<br />
3 poles 4 poles PD 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6V 63 W MP I n 6300 A LI 43264 43309<br />
LSI 43266 43311 LSI 43270 43315 LSI 43274 43319<br />
LSIG 43268 43313 LSIG 43272 43317 LSIG 43276 43321<br />
148
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6<br />
<strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6 W FP HR 37825 37830<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6 W FP VR 37876 37880<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6 W FP F 37926 37931<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E6 W FP FL 37976 37981<br />
149
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E1B/MS 08 I u (40 °C) = 800A I cw (1 s) = 36kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
150<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1B/MS 08 F HR 37528 37555<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1B/MS 08 F VR 37587 37583<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1B/MS 08 F F 37698 37695<br />
F = FIXED → E1B/MS 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cw (1 s) = 36kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1B/MS 12 F HR 37529 37556<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1B/MS 12 F VR 37586 37588<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1B/MS 12 F F 37697 37696
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E1/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E1B/MS 08 I u (40 °C) = 800A I cw (1 s) = 36kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1B/MS 08 W MP 37639 37642<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E1B/MS 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cw (1 s) = 36kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1B/MS 12 W MP 37640 37641<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 W FP HR 37821 37826<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1 W FP VR 37872 37877<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1 W FP F 37922 37927<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E1 W FP FL 37972 37977<br />
151
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E2N/MS 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cw (1 s) = 55kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
152<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N/MS 12 F HR 37531 37559<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N/MS 12 F VR 37584 37590<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2N/MS 12 F F 37708 37703<br />
F = FIXED → E2B/MS 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cw (1 s) = 40kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2B/MS 16 F HR 43472 37557<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2B/MS 16 F VR 37585 37589<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2B/MS 16 F F 37699 37702<br />
F = FIXED → E2N/MS 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cw (1 s) = 55kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N/MS 16 F HR 37532 37560<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N/MS 16 F VR 37593 37594<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2N/MS 16 F F 37707 37704<br />
F = FIXED → E2B/MS 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cw (1 s) = 40kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2B/MS 20 F HR 37530 37558<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2B/MS 20 F VR 37592 37591<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2B/MS 20 F F 37700 37701
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E2N/MS 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cw (1 s) = 55kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N/MS 20 F HR 37533 37561<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2N/MS 20 F VR 37596 37595<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2N/MS 20 F F 37706 37705<br />
153
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E2/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2N/MS 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cw (1 s) = 55kA<br />
154<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N/MS 12 W MP 37648 37652<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2B/MS 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cw (1 s) = 40kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2B/MS 16 W MP 37646 37643<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2N/MS 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cw (1 s) = 55kA<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2 W FP HR 37822 37827<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2 W FP VR 37873 37886<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2 W FP F 37923 37928<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N/MS 16 W MP 37647 37651<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2B/MS 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cw (1 s) = 40kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2B/MS 20 W MP 37645 37644<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E2N/MS 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cw (1 s) = 55kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2N/MS 20 W MP 37649 37650<br />
E2 W FP FL 37973 37978
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E3S/MS 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 12 F HR 37536 37564<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S/MS 12 F VR 37601 37602<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S/MS 12 F F 37722 37713<br />
F = FIXED → E3S/MS 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 16 F HR 37537 37565<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S/MS 16 F VR 37610 37603<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S/MS 16 F F 37721 37714<br />
F = FIXED → E3S/MS 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 20 F HR 37538 37566<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S/MS 20 F VR 37609 37604<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S/MS 20F F 37720 37715<br />
F = FIXED → E3N/MS 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cw (1 s) = 65kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3N/MS 25 F HR 37534 37562<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3N/MS 25 F VR 37597 37598<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3N/MS 25 F F 37709 37712<br />
155
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E3S/MS 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
156<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 25 F HR 37539 37567<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S/MS 25 F VR 37608 37605<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S/MS 25 F F 37719 37716<br />
F = FIXED → E3S/MS 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cw (1 s) = 65kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3N/MS 32 F HR 37535 37563<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3N/MS 32 F VR 37600 37599<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3N/MS 32 F F 37710 37711<br />
F = FIXED → E3S/MS 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 32 F HR 37540 37568<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3S/MS 32 F VR 37607 37606<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3S/MS 32F F 37718 37717
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E3/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S/MS 12 I u (40 °C) = 1250A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 12 W MP 37657 37664<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S/MS 16 I u (40 °C) = 1600A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 16 W MP 37660 37665<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S/MS 20 I u (40 °C) = 2000A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3 W FP HR 37823 37828<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3 W FP VR 37874 37878<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3 W FP F 37924 37929<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 20 W MP 37658 37666<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3N/MS 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cw (1 s) = 65kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3N/MS 25 W MP 37656 37653<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S/MS 25 I u (40 °C) = 2500A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 25 W MP 37661 37662<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3N/MS 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cw (1 s) = 65kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3N/MS 32 W MP 37655 37654<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E3S/MS 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3S/MS 32 W MP 37659 37663<br />
E3 W FP FL 37974 37979<br />
157
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E4H/MS 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
158<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4H/MS 32 F HR 37547 37575<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4H/MS 32 F VR 37623 37626<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4H/MS 32 F F 37743 37735<br />
F = FIXED → E4S/MS 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4S/MS 40 F HR 37546 37574<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4S/MS 40 F VR 37622 37621<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4S/MS 40 F F 37734 37733<br />
F = FIXED → E4H/MS 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4H/MS 40 F HR 37548 37576<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4H/MS 40 F VR 37624 37625<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4H/MS 40 F F 37742 37736
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E4/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E4H/MS 32 I u (40 °C) = 3200A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4H/MS 32 W MP 37682 37679<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E4S/MS 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cw (1 s) = 75kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4S/MS 40 W MP 37677 37678<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E4H/MS 40 I u (40 °C) = 4000A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4 W FP HR 37824 37829<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4 W FP VR 37875 37879<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4 W FP F 37925 37930<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4H/MS 40 W MP 37681 37680<br />
E4 W FP FL 37975 37980<br />
159
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
F = FIXED → E6H/MS 50 I u (40 °C) = 5000A I cw (1 s) = 100 kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
160<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6H/MS 50 F HR 37549 37577<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6H/MS 50 F VR 37630 37627<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6H/MS 50 F F 37741 37738<br />
F = FIXED → E6H/MS 63 I u (40 °C) = 6300A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6H/MS 63 F HR 37550 37578<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6H/MS 63 F VR 37629 37628<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6H/MS 63 F F 37740 37739
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> E6/MS<br />
Switch-disconnector<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6H/MS 50 I u (40 °C) = 5000A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6H/MS 50 W MP 37683 37686<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → E6H/MS 63 I u (40 °C) = 6300A I cw (1 s) = 100kA<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6H/MS 63 W MP 37684 37685<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE → Fixed parts<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6 W FP HR 37825 37830<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6 W FP VR 37876 37880<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6 W FP F 37926 37931<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E6 W FP FL 37976 37981<br />
161
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> CS<br />
Isolating truck<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE<br />
162<br />
I u 1250<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 CS 12 W MP 37752 37753<br />
I u 2000<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2 CS 20 W MP 37762 37769<br />
I u 3200<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3 CS 32 W MP 37763 37768<br />
I u 4000<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4 CS 40 W MP 37764 37767<br />
I u 6300<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6 CS 63 W MP 37765 37766<br />
Fixed parts<br />
See page 165
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> MTP<br />
Earthing switch<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE<br />
earthing of<br />
top pliers<br />
earthing of<br />
bottom pliers<br />
I u 1250<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 MTP 12 W MP 37758 37759 37761 37760<br />
I u 2000<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2 MTP 20 W MP 37786 37787 37794 37795<br />
I u 3200<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3 MTP 32 W MP 37789 37788 37796 37797<br />
I u 4000<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4 MTP 40 W MP 37790 37791 37798 37799<br />
I u 6300<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6 MTP 63 W MP 37792 37793 37800 37801<br />
Fixed parts<br />
See page 165<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
163
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> MT<br />
Earthing truck<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE<br />
earthing of<br />
top pliers<br />
earthing of<br />
bottom pliers<br />
164<br />
I u 1250<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 MT 12 W MP 37754 37755 37756 37757<br />
I u 2000<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2 MT 20 W MP 37770 37771 37785 37784<br />
I u 3200<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3 MT 32 W MP 37773 37772 37782 37783<br />
I u 4000<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4 MT 40 W MP 37774 37775 37975 37780<br />
I u 6300<br />
code 1SDA0 R1 bottom jaw-type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
contacts<br />
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6 MT 63 W MP 37777 37776 37778 37779<br />
Fixed parts<br />
See page 165<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
top jaw-type<br />
contacts<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of<br />
earthing of
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> PF<br />
Fixed parts<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE Fixed parts E1<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 W FP HR 37821 37826<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E1 W FP VR 37872 37877<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E1 W FP F 37922 37927<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E1 W FP FL 37972 37977<br />
Fixed parts E2<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E2 W FP HR 37822 37827<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E2 W FP VR 37873 37886<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E2 W FP F 37923 37928<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E2 W FP FL 37973 37978<br />
Fixed parts E3<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E3 W FP HR 37823 37828<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E3 W FP VR 37874 37878<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E3 W FP F 37924 37929<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E3 W FP FL 37974 37979<br />
165
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong> PF<br />
Fixed parts<br />
W = WITHDRAWABLE Fixed parts E4<br />
166<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E4 W FP HR 37824 37829<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E4 W FP VR 37875 37879<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E4 W FP F 37925 37930<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E4 W FP FL 37975 37980<br />
Fixed parts E6<br />
HR = Horizontal<br />
rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E6 W FP HR 37825 37830<br />
VR = Vertical<br />
rear terminals<br />
E6 W FP VR 37876 37880<br />
F = Front<br />
terminals<br />
E6 W FP F 37926 37931<br />
FL = Flat<br />
terminals<br />
E6 W FP FL 37976 37981
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
Electrical accessories<br />
1) Shunt opening/closing release<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
Opening Closing<br />
24 V– 38286 38296<br />
30 V ∼ 38287 38297<br />
48 V ∼ 38288 38298<br />
60 V ∼ 38289 38299<br />
110...120 V ∼ 38290 38300<br />
120...127 V ∼ 38291 38301<br />
220...240 V ∼ 38292 38302<br />
240...250 V ∼ 38293 38303<br />
380...400 V – 38294 38304<br />
440...480 V – 38295 38305<br />
The shunt opening release and closing release share the same construction and are therefore interchangeable.<br />
Their function is determined by the position in which they are mounted on the <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
2a) Under<strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
24 V – 38306<br />
30 V ∼ 38307<br />
48 V ∼ 38308<br />
60 V ∼ 38309<br />
110...120 V ∼ 38310<br />
120...127 V ∼ 38311<br />
220...240 V ∼ 38312<br />
240...250 V ∼ 38313<br />
380...400 V ∼ 38314<br />
440...480 V ∼ 38315<br />
2b) Electronic time-delay device for under<strong>voltage</strong> release<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
24...30 V ∼ 38316<br />
48 V ∼ 38317<br />
60 V ∼ 38318<br />
110...115 V ∼ 38319<br />
220...250 V ∼ 38320<br />
3) Geared motor for automatic charging of closing springs<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
24...30 V ∼ 38321<br />
48...60 V ∼ 38322<br />
100...130 V ∼ 38323<br />
220...250 V ∼ 38324<br />
Note: supplied as standard with limit contact and microswitch for signalling the closing springs are charged (see Accessory 5c).<br />
167
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
168<br />
4) Signal for overload current releases tripped<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
mechanical 38337<br />
electrical (1) 38338<br />
(1) Requires mechanical signal as well.<br />
5a) Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker open/closed<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
4 auxiliary contacts (2) 38326<br />
10 auxiliary contacts (3) (4) 38327<br />
10 auxiliary contacts (3) (5) 46523<br />
15 additional auxiliary contacts (6) 43475<br />
15 additional auxiliary contacts (special version for withdrawable) (6) 48827<br />
(2) Order for MS-CS-MT-MTP version only. Already included for automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
(3) Not available with PR112 release.<br />
(4) Order for MS-CS-MT-MTP version. Order as a loose kit only for automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
(5) To be ordered mounted only, with automatic <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
(6) Outside <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker. Order as alternative to various types of interlock and to accessory 8e.<br />
For mounting on fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker requires accessory 10.4 as well (Interlock plate for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker).<br />
5b) Electrical signalling of <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker connected/isolated for test/<br />
isolated<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
E1/E6 - 5 auxiliary contacts 38361<br />
E1/E2 - 10 auxiliary contacts 3 poles 38360<br />
E1/E2 - 10 auxiliary contacts 4 poles 43467<br />
E3 - 10 auxiliary contacts 3 poles 43468<br />
E3 - 10 auxiliary contacts 4 poles 43469<br />
E4/E6 - 10 auxiliary contacts 3/4 poles 43470<br />
5c) Contact for signalling closing springs charged<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38325<br />
Note: Order as alternative to geared motor.<br />
5d) Contact for signalling under<strong>voltage</strong> release energised<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
1 normally open contact 38340<br />
1 normally closed contact 38341
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
6a) Current transformer for neutral conductor outside <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
E1 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
R250 38269<br />
R400 38270<br />
R800 38271<br />
R1250 38272<br />
E2 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
R250 38269<br />
R400 38270<br />
R800 38271<br />
R1250 38272<br />
R1600 38273<br />
R2000 38274<br />
E3 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
R250 48952<br />
R400 48953<br />
R800 38277<br />
R1250 38278<br />
R1600 38279<br />
R2000 38280<br />
R2500 38281<br />
R3200 38282<br />
E4 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
R2000 38274<br />
R3200 38275<br />
R4000 38276<br />
E6 E6<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
R3200 38282<br />
R4000 38283<br />
R5000 38284<br />
R6300 38285<br />
6b) Homopolar toroid for the main power supply earthing conductor<br />
In 100 A 48067<br />
In 250 A 48068<br />
In 400 A 48069<br />
In 800 A 48070<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
169
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
170<br />
Mechanical accessories<br />
7) Mechanical operation counter<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38345<br />
8a) Lock in open position<br />
E1/6 - key lock code 1SDA0 R1<br />
for 1 <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker (different keys) 38350<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 3004222) 38346<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 0025431) 38347<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 0233424) 38348<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 0335452) 38349<br />
E1/6 - padlock code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38351<br />
Note: Order as alternative to accessory 9a.<br />
8b) Circuit-breaker lock in connected/isolated/isolated for test position<br />
E1/6 - key lock + padlock code 1SDA0 R1<br />
for 1 <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker (different keys) 38356<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 3004222) 38352<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 0025431) 38353<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 0233424) 38354<br />
for sets of <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> (same keys No. 0335452) 38355<br />
8c) Accessory for lock in isolated/isolated for test position<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38357<br />
Note: Order as alternative to Accessory 8b.<br />
8d) Accessory for padlock device for shutters<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38363<br />
8e) Mechanical lock for compartment door<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– (1) (2) (3) 45039<br />
(1) order as an alternative to the various types of interlocks and accessory 5a (15 auxiliary contacts)<br />
(2) the use of accessory 10.2 is necessary for installation<br />
(3) for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, plate 10.4
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Circuit-breaker and fixed part accessories<br />
9a) Protection cover opening and closing pushbuttons<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38343<br />
Note: Order as alternative to Accessory 8a.<br />
9b) IP54 protective cover for door<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38344<br />
10.1) Interlock cables for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-<strong>breakers</strong> or fixed parts<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
Type Horizontal Vertical<br />
A 38329 38333<br />
B 38330 38334<br />
C 38331 38335<br />
D 38332 38336<br />
Note: Order one type of cable for each interlock<br />
10.2) Interlock for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker/moving part of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>breaker<br />
Type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
E1 38366<br />
E2 38366<br />
E3 38367<br />
E4 - 3 poles 38368<br />
E4 - 4 poles / E6 - 3 poles 43466<br />
E6 - 4 poles 38369<br />
Note: Order one accessory for each fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker/moving part of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
10.3) Interlock for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker/fixed part of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
E1/6 - Type code 1SDA0 R1<br />
A 38364<br />
B 38364<br />
C 38365<br />
D 38364<br />
Note: Order one accessory for each fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker/fixed part of withdrawable <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker.<br />
10.4) Interlock plate for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
E1/6 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
– 38358<br />
Note: Order for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker only.<br />
171
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Microprocessor-based releases and current transformer<br />
Microprocessor-based releases<br />
E1/6 PR111 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1 PR112 code 1SDA0 R1<br />
P<br />
P<br />
PD<br />
172<br />
LI 38013<br />
LSI 38012 LSI 38010 LSI 38008<br />
LSIG 38011 LSIG 38009 LSIG 38007<br />
Current transformers<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 poles 4 poles<br />
E1 I n 250 A 38014 38020<br />
I n 400 A 38015 38021<br />
I n 800 A 38016 38022<br />
I n 1250 A 38017 38023<br />
E2 I n 250 A 38014 38020<br />
I n 400 A 38015 38021<br />
I n 800 A 38016 38022<br />
I n 1250 A 38017 38023<br />
I n 1600 A 38018 38024<br />
I n 2000 A 38019 38025<br />
E3 I n 250 A 48741 48742<br />
I n 400 A 48743 48744<br />
I n 800 A 38026 38032<br />
I n 1250 A 38027 38033<br />
I n 1600 A 38028 38034<br />
I n 2000 A 38029 38035<br />
I n 2500 A 38030 38036<br />
I n 3200 A 38031 38037<br />
E4 I n 2000 A 38038 38041<br />
I n 3200 A 38039 38042<br />
I n 4000 A 38040 38043<br />
E6 I n 3200 A 38044 38048<br />
I n 4000 A 38045 38049<br />
I n 5000 A 38046 38050<br />
I n 6300 A 38047 38051
Ordering codes<br />
<strong>SACE</strong> <strong>Emax</strong><br />
Conversion kit for fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker or fixed parts<br />
Kit for converting fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
with horizontal rear terminals to vertical rear terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 terminals 4 terminals<br />
for 3 poles for 4 poles<br />
E1 38052 38057<br />
E2 38053 38058<br />
E3 38054 38059<br />
E4 38055 38060<br />
E6 38056 38061<br />
Notes: Each kit fits both upper and lower application. To convert a complete <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, order 2 kits.<br />
Kit for converting fixed <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker<br />
with horizontal rear terminals to front terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 terminals 4 terminals<br />
for 3 poles for 4 poles<br />
E1 38062 38067<br />
E2 38063 38068<br />
E3 38064 38069<br />
E4 38065 38070<br />
E6 38066 38071<br />
Notes: Each kit fits both upper and lower application. To convert a complete <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, order 2 kits.<br />
Kit for converting fixed parts<br />
with horizontal rear terminals to front terminals<br />
code 1SDA0 R1<br />
3 terminals 4 terminals<br />
for 3 poles for 4 poles<br />
E1 38062 38067<br />
E2 45031 45035<br />
E3 45032 45036<br />
E4 45033 45037<br />
E6 45034 45038<br />
Notes: Each kit fits both upper and lower application. To convert a complete <strong>circuit</strong>-breaker, order 2 kits.<br />
173
Due to the continuous development of Standards and materials, the specifications and dimensions in this catalogue may only be<br />
considered binding on confirmation by ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V.<br />
174
ABB <strong>SACE</strong> L.V. SpA<br />
Head Office: Via Baioni, 35<br />
24123 Bergamo - Italy<br />
Tel.: +39 035 395111<br />
Telex: 301627 ABBSAC I<br />
Telefax: +39 035 395306-035 395433<br />
http://www.abb.com<br />
http://www.abb.com<br />
ITSLV 604019/011 en